Mitsubishi Electric GT14 User Manual
Hide thumbs Also See for GT14:
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Summary of Contents for Mitsubishi Electric GT14

  • Page 3: Safety Precautions

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING"...
  • Page 4 [DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● The display section is an analog-resistive type touch panel. If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more, the switch that is located around the center of the touched point, if any, may operate. Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously.
  • Page 5 [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to/from the panel. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. ●...
  • Page 6 [WIRING PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring. Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions. ● Please make sure to ground FG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying 100 or less which is used exclusively for the GOT.
  • Page 7 Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction. ● Replace battery with GT11-50BAT by Mitsubishi electric Co. only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. ● Dispose of used battery promptly.
  • Page 8 [DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste. ● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the User's Manual of the GOT to be used.) [TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION...
  • Page 9: Table Of Contents

    Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use. CONTENTS GT14 Handy GOT User's Manual 1/2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................A - 1 INTRODUCTION ............................A - 7 CONTENTS .............................. A - 7 MANUALS...............................A - 33...
  • Page 10 Applicable With wall-mounting Attachment................. 6 - 34 6.7.2 Mounting ..........................6 - 34 6.7.3 Attachment of GT14 handy GOT ..................6 - 35 7. INSTALLATION Installing Procedure ......................... 7 - 1 7.1.1 Holding the Handy GOT in hand................... 7 - 1 7.1.2...
  • Page 11 9. HANDLING OF POWER WIRING AND SWITCH Internal Wiring Diagram of GT14 Handy..................9 - 3 Power Wiring ........................... 9 - 4 9.2.1 Power wiring and grounding ....................9 - 4 9.2.2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring/Remedy ............... 9 - 5 Wiring inside and outside the panel....................
  • Page 12 12.2 Operation Setting (Settings Regarding Operation) ................ 12 - 7 12.2.1 Operation setting functions ....................12 - 7 12.2.2 Display operation of Operation ................... 12 - 8 12.2.3 Setting operation of operation..................... 12 - 9 12.2.4 Security level change......................12 - 10 12.2.5 Utility Call Key Setting ......................
  • Page 13 15.2.4 Touch panel check ......................15 - 12 15.2.5 I/O check .......................... 15 - 14 15.2.6 Ethernet status check ....................... 15 - 18 15.3 System Alarm Display........................15 - 20 15.4 GOT start time ..........................15 - 22 16. CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION (CLEAN) 17.
  • Page 14 21.2 System Configuration ........................21 - 4 21.2.1 Connecting to QCPU ......................21 - 4 21.2.2 Connecting to LCPU ......................21 - 5 21.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU...................... 21 - 7 21.2.4 Connecting to ACPU......................21 - 8 21.2.5 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-F Series................... 21 - 9 21.2.6 Connecting to FXCPU ......................
  • Page 15 23.1.2 Ethernet module ......................... 23 - 4 23.2 System Configuration ........................23 - 5 23.2.1 Connecting to Ethernet module ..................23 - 5 23.2.2 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C controller module........23 - 9 23.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F ....................23 - 11 23.2.4 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module .........
  • Page 16 24.6 Precautions ..........................24 - 16 MITSUBISHI FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS 25. INVERTER CONNECTION 25.1 Connectable Model List ......................... 25 - 1 25.2 System Configuration ........................25 - 2 25.2.1 Connecting to FREQROL-A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L ........25 - 2 25.2.2 Connecting to FREQROL-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700PJ ........25 - 7 25.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700/sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX)......
  • Page 17 26.5.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4, J3, or JE Series ............26 - 20 26.5.4 Station number setting...................... 26 - 20 26.6 Device Range that Can Be Set....................26 - 21 26.7 Precautions..........................26 - 21 27. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 27.1 Connectable Model List .........................
  • Page 18 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 30. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 30.1 What is Multi-channel Function?....................30 - 1 30.2 System Configuration ........................30 - 2 30.3 GOT Side Settings ......................... 30 - 3 30.3.1 General flow from system selection to drawing ..............30 - 3 30.3.2 Determining the connection type and channel No.
  • Page 19 Appendix.3 Transportation Precautions .....................App - 11 Appendix.3.1 Relevant models......................App - 11 Appendix.3.2 Transportation guidelines ...................App - 11 GT14 Handy GOT User's Manual 2/2 CONNECTIONS TO NON-MITSUBISHI PRODUCTS 32. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 32.1 Connectable Model List ......................... 32 - 1 32.2...
  • Page 20 33.2.5 System configuration for connecting to C200HS, C200H, C200HX, C200HG, or C200HE ........................33 - 14 33.2.6 System configuration for connecting to CS1H, CS1G, or CS1D ........33 - 17 33.2.7 System configuration for connecting to C1000H or C2000H ..........33 - 20 33.2.8 System configuration for connecting to CV500, CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1 ....
  • Page 21 35.2.3 Connecting to KV-1000 ...................... 35 - 7 35.2.4 Connecting to KV-700 ...................... 35 - 10 35.2.5 Connection diagram ......................35 - 13 35.2.6 GOT side settings ......................35 - 16 35.2.7 PLC side setting ....................... 35 - 17 35.3 Ethernet Connection ........................
  • Page 22 37.5 PLC Side Setting ......................... 37 - 18 37.5.1 Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JG-P, PC3JD, PC3JD-C, PC3J, PC3JL, PC2J, PC2JS or PC2JR .......................... 37 - 18 37.5.2 Connecting to PC2JC ....................... 37 - 18 37.5.3 Connecting to PC2J16P or PC2J16PR ................37 - 19 37.5.4 RS-232/RS-422 interface converter setting ..............
  • Page 23 39.5 Indicating Controller Side Setting ....................39 - 10 39.5.1 Connecting to ACS-13A, DCL- 33A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301- M, PCD-300 Series, PC-900 Series (PC-955-/M, C5, PC- 935-/M, C5) ............. 39 - 10 39.5.2 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR- 100, FCR-23A, FIR Series, PC-900 Series (PC-955-/M, C, PC-935-/M, C) ...................
  • Page 24 41.2.5 PLC side setting........................ 41 - 11 41.3 Ethernet Connection ........................41 - 12 41.3.1 Connecting to Unified Controller nv Series............... 41 - 12 41.3.2 GOT side settings ......................41 - 13 41.3.3 PLC side setting........................ 41 - 14 41.3.4 Precautions........................
  • Page 25 44.2.4 Connecting to FP3 or FP5 ....................44 - 8 44.2.5 Connecting to FP10(S) ..................... 44 - 11 44.2.6 Connecting to FP-M(C20TC) or FP-M(C32TC) ..............44 - 14 44.2.7 Connecting to FP10SH ..................... 44 - 16 44.2.8 Connecting to FPΣ......................44 - 18 44.2.9 Connecting to FP-X ......................
  • Page 26 47.2 Serial Connection .......................... 47 - 2 47.2.1 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX-F55 ............47 - 2 47.2.2 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX-F70 ............47 - 7 47.2.3 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX-F120S/140S/15[]S ......47 - 13 47.2.4 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX-SX SPH ..........
  • Page 27 49.2.8 GOT side settings ......................49 - 19 49.2.9 PLC side setting ....................... 49 - 20 49.3 Ethernet Connection ........................49 - 23 49.3.1 System configuration for connecting to MP-920 or MP2200 or MP2300 or MP2300S or CP-9200SH or CP-312 or CP-317..................49 - 23 49.3.2 GOT side settings ......................
  • Page 28 51.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting ................... 51 - 25 51.5.1 Connecting to GREEN Series................... 51 - 25 51.5.2 Connecting to UT100 Series..................... 51 - 25 51.5.3 Connecting to UT2000 Series................... 51 - 25 51.5.4 Connecting to UTAdvanced Series................... 51 - 26 51.5.5 Connecting to converter (ML2-)..................
  • Page 29 52.7 Precautions..........................52 - 44 53. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 53.1 Connectable Model List ......................... 53 - 1 53.2 System Configuration ........................53 - 2 53.2.1 Connecting to H-PCP-J ...................... 53 - 2 53.2.2 Connecting to H-PCP-A or H-PCP-B.................. 53 - 6 53.2.3 Connecting to SRZ ......................
  • Page 30 54.2.2 System configuration for connecting to MicroLogix1000/1200/1400/1500 Series ....54 - 4 54.2.3 System configuration for connecting to Control/Compact/FlexLogix Series ....... 54 - 6 54.2.4 Connection diagram......................54 - 7 54.2.5 GOT side settings ......................54 - 10 54.2.6 PLC side setting........................ 54 - 11 54.3 Ethernet Connection ........................
  • Page 31 56.6 Device Range that Can Be Set....................56 - 15 57. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 57.1 Connectable Model List ......................... 57 - 1 57.2 System Configuration ........................57 - 1 57.2.1 Connecting to Flexi Soft ..................... 57 - 1 57.3 GOT Side Settings.........................
  • Page 32 61.4.4 M devices.......................... 61 - 12 61.4.5 SD devices........................61 - 13 61.4.6 SM devices ........................61 - 16 61.5 Message Formats ........................61 - 18 61.5.1 Data format type and application ..................61 - 18 61.5.2 List of commands......................61 - 19 61.5.3 Formats 1, 2 (GOT-A900 Series microcomputer connection) ..........
  • Page 33 63.2 System Configuration ........................63 - 1 63.2.1 Connecting to MODBUS equipment ................... 63 - 1 63.3 Connection Diagram ........................63 - 3 63.3.1 RS-232 cable ........................63 - 3 63.3.2 RS-422/485 cable ....................... 63 - 4 63.4 GOT Side Settings......................... 63 - 6 63.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)..........
  • Page 34 A - 32...
  • Page 35 MANUALS The following table lists the manual relevant to this product. Refer to each manual for any purpose. Manual Number Manual Name Packaging (Model code) GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product SH-080866ENG GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM (1D7MB9) SH-080867ENG...
  • Page 36 Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157, GT156, GT155 GT1455-Q Abbreviation of GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD GT145 GT1450-Q Abbreviation of GT1450-QMBDE, GT1450-QMBD, GT1450-QLBDE, GT1450-QLBD GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455-Q, GT1450-Q GT1275 GT1275-V Abbreviation of GT1275-VNBA, GT1275-VNBD GT1265 GT1265-V Abbreviation of GT1265-VNBA, GT1265-VNBD...
  • Page 37 GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900 Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M Connection Conversion Adapter GT10-9PT5S RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set  Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description...
  • Page 38 GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO, Protective cover for oil GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96, Attachment GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85...
  • Page 39  Software Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SWDNC-GTWK3-E and SWDNC-GTWK3-EA GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series...
  • Page 40  Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description Abbreviation of IAI Corporation AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation) OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation SHINKO...
  • Page 41 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL  Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual. Following GOT is shown. Shows GT14 Handy. Connection cable Number of Connector Total connectable External cable RS-422 connector Communic conversion box model distance Model name Model name...
  • Page 42 System Configuration Examples System Configuration Examples in each chapter. (When connecting the PLC [MELSEC-Q] and GT14 Handy, with RS-422 cable) 1) Connect the RS-422 conversion cable[FA-CNV2405CBL]to the [MELSEC-Q]. 2) [GT14 Handy] and Connector conversion box [GT11H-CNB-37S] are Indicates the commercially available connected with External cable [GT11H-C100-37P].
  • Page 43 OVERVIEW  Handy GOT The Handy GOT (hereinafter abbreviated as GOT) is used as an operation terminal in connection with the controllers such as MELSEC-FX, Q series or third party PLCs. It is an all-in-one operation terminal that is equipped with the display unit with touch switches integrated with the mechanical keys (operation switches) for inputting a command to a machine.
  • Page 44 1.1 Features  Display unit The TFT color LCD with high intensity, wide viewing angle and high definition is adopted as the display unit. Monitoring for turning ON/OFF bit devices of a PLC, forced turning ON/OFF the bit devices of a PLC, monitoring the word device set value/current value and changing that numeric values are easily made.
  • Page 45: Rough Procedure

    1.1.1 Rough procedure The outline procedures before operating GOT and the descriptions of each item are shown below. Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Install GT Designer3 in the PC. (Fundamentals). Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Create project data.
  • Page 46 1 - 4 1. OVERVIEW 1.1 Features...
  • Page 47: Overall Configuration

    Battery USB memory Protective sheet SD card Connector conversion box Drawing PC CC-Link interface unit Commercially available The GT14 Handy cannot be connected to a bar code reader or a printer. 2 - 1 2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2.1 Overall Configuration...
  • Page 48: System Equipment

    * * * * 50 : Dedicated for 5.7" H : For Handy GOT 16 : Dedicated for GT16 15 : Dedicated for GT15 14 : Dedicated for GT14 11 : Dedicated for GT11 10 : Dedicated for GT10 09 : 05 :...
  • Page 49: Option

    9MB, built-in battery, built-in Ethernet interface Accessories The following products are the accessories of the GOT main unit. Two keys for selector switch GT14 Handy GOT General Description (describes product outline, specifications, external dimensions, etc.) 2.2.2 OPTION External cable (Sold separately)
  • Page 50 Connection cables for MITSUBISHI PLCs (Sold separately) Cable Product name Model name Contents length FXCPU direct connection GT01-C10R4-8P For connecting FXCPU (MINI DIN 8 pins) and Connector Conversion Box. cable GT01-C30R4-8P For connecting FXCPU expansion board (MINI DIN 8 pins) and Connector FX expansion board Conversion Box.
  • Page 51 Connection cables for SHARP PLCs (Sold separately) Product Cable Model name Description name length GT09-C30R40601-15P For connecting Connector Conversion Box to Sharp PLC GT09-C100R40601-15P GT09-C30R40602-15P RS-422 cable For connecting Connector Conversion Box to Sharp PLC GT09-C100R40602-15P GT09-C30R40603-6T For connecting Connector Conversion Box to Sharp link unit GT09-C100R40603-6T GT09-C30R20601-15P For connecting Connector Conversion Box to Sharp PLC...
  • Page 52 Connection cables for HITACHI PLCs (Sold separately) Product Cable Model name Description name length RS-232 cable GT09-C30R21301-9S For connecting Connector Conversion Box to HITACHI communication module GT09-C30R41301-9S RS-422 cable For connecting Connector Conversion Box to HITACHI PLC GT09-C100R41301-9S Connection cables for HITACHI IES PLCs (Sold separately) Product Cable Model name...
  • Page 53 Commercially-available SD card Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the operation-checked models, refer to "Operation Check Results of Third Party SD Cards on GT14 Model" (Hime-T-P-0089) separately available, or contact your local distributor. 2 - 7 2.
  • Page 54 USB memory (Sold separately) Product name Model name Description USB memory Commercially-available USB memory Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the operation-checked models, refer to "List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series" (GOT-A-0010) separately available, or contact your local distributor.
  • Page 55: General Specifications

    SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 General Specifications Item Specifications Display section 0 to 40 Operating ambient Other than temperature 0 to 40 display section Storage ambient temperature -20 to 60 Operating ambient humidity 10 to 90% RH, non-condensing Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90% RH, non-condensing Frequency Acceleration Half-amplitude Sweep Count...
  • Page 56: Performance Specifications

    3.2 Performance Specifications The performance specifications are as follows. Specifications Item GT1455HS-QTBDE GT1450HS-QMBDE TFT monochrome (black/white) liquid crystal Type TFT color liquid crystal display display Screen size 5.7" Resolution 320 × 240 [dots] Display size 115 (W) × 86 (H) [mm] 16-dot standard font: 20 characters ×...
  • Page 57 Protective structure External dimensions 145 (W) × 185 (H) × 79.3 (D) [mm] Weight Approx. 0.79kg (GT14 Handy main unit only) Compatible software package Version1.71Z or later (GT Designer3 version) Bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (unlit) may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics. It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom, as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements.
  • Page 58: Power Supply Specifications

    3.3 Power Supply Specifications Specifications Item GT1455HS-QTBDE GT1450HS-QMBDE Input power supply voltage DC24V (+10% -15%) Power consumption 8.4W or less (350mA/DC24V) 7.5W or less (310mA/DC24V) At backlight off 7.0W or less (290mA/DC24V) Inrush current 30A or less (maximum load) 2ms Permissible instantaneous Within 5ms power failure time...
  • Page 59: Battery Specifications

    SRAM user area. A battery is installed to GT14 Handy GOT when shipped from the factory. 3.4.1 Applicable battery The following batteries are applicable for GT14 Handy GOT. Model Description For clock data, alarm history, recipe data, time action setting value, advanced alarm, advanced recipe,...
  • Page 60 3 - 6 3. SPECIFICATIONS 3.4 Battery specifications...
  • Page 61: Front Panel

    PARTS NAME 4.1 Front Panel 4.1.1 Name and specifications (1)(2) Name Specifications Display section Displays the utility screen and the user creation screen. Touch panel For touch switch operation on the utility screen and the user creation screen. Operation switch (6 switches) Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact) Emergency stop switch Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact)
  • Page 62: Back Panel

    4.2 Back Panel 4.2.1 Name and specifications Environmental protection back cover closed Environmental protection back cover opened Name Specifications Opened and closed when the PLC communication type is changed (Ethernet RS-422 Environmental protection back cover 232, before shipping: Ethernet), or the battery is replaced. Environmental protection back cover screw For opening and closing the environmental protection back cover (drop prevention screw) Hook for hanging on walls...
  • Page 63: Opening And Closing Of Environmental Protection Back Cover

    4.2.2 Opening and closing of environmental protection back cover  Opening Loosen the environmental protection back cover screws at four points to remove the cover. Environmental protection back cover screw  Closing Mount the environmental protection back cover, and tighten the screws with the following torque.
  • Page 64: Top Face (Interface)

    4.3 Top Face (Interface) 4.3.1 Names and specifications  Interface environmental protection cover closed  Interface environmental protection cover opened LED1 LED2 (7) (6) Name Specifications Emergency stop switch guard cover Threaded hole for mounting the GT14H-50ESCOV type emergency stop switch guard (option) (M3) installing hole Interface environmental protection cover Opened and closed when the USB port is used or the SD card is inserted.
  • Page 65: Ul, Cul Standards

    Checking method of hard ware version. Confirm the hardware version with the products rating plate. Hardware Version MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION  General notes on Power supply This equipment must be supplied by a UL Listed or Recognized 24V DC rated power supply and UL Listed or Recognized fuse rated not higher than 4A, or a UL Listed Class 2 power supply.
  • Page 66: Emc Directive

    Directives and put a "CE mark" on their products. • This product is designed for use in industrial applications. • Authorized Representative in the European Community: Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Gothaer Str. 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany 5.2.1...
  • Page 67 Control panel Make sure to combine the GT14 Handy GOT with the Connector Conversion Box to comply with the EMC directive. The Connector conversion box is an open type device (device installed to another device) and must be installed in a conductive control panel.
  • Page 68: Emc Directive-Compliant System Configuration

    POINT POINT POINT (1) System configuration GT14 Handy conforms to the EMC Directive only when used in the connection type above, via connector conversion box. (2) Connected devices If connecting to the PLC or microcomputer other than Mitsubishi products (MELSEC-Q series, MELSEC-L series, MELSEC-QnA , MELSEC-A series or MELSEC-FX series) please refer to the EMC Directive compliance manual for that specific device.
  • Page 69  About the cable used Any device which utilizes a data communication function is susceptible to the wider effects of local EMC noise. Therefore, when installing any communication cables care should always be taken with the routing and location of those cables.
  • Page 70: Precautions For Wiring/Connecting The Emc Directive-Compliant Product

    5.2.3 Precautions for Wiring/Connecting the EMC Directive-Compliant Product Wire and connect GOT1000 series equipments as instructed below. If the GOT1000 series equipments are configured in a way different from the following instructions, the system may not comply with EMC directives. ...
  • Page 71 POINT POINT POINT Configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device when connecting the GOT to a controller. The following gives the instructions to ensure the machinery comply with the EMC Directive. However, the manufacturer of the machinery must finally determine how to make it comply with the EMC Directives: if it is actually compliant with the EMC Directives.
  • Page 72 5 - 8 5. UL, cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5.2 EMC Directive...
  • Page 73: Applicable Sd Card

    Commercially-available SD card Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable. For the operation-checked models, refer to "Operation Check Results of Third Party SD Cards on GT14 Model" (Hime-T-P-0089) separately available, or contact your local distributor. 6.1.2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card Install/remove the SD card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or SD card access switch is "OFF".
  • Page 74 SD card nameplate side To install the SD card to the GOT, insert the SD card into the SD card interface with its front side outside. SD card inserting direction Turn the SD card access switch on. After the SD card access switch is turned on, the SD card can be used.
  • Page 75 POINT POINT POINT Precautions for removing the SD card (1) While the SD card access LED is on, do not install/remove the SD card or power off the GOT. To do so may cause data corruption or malfunction. (2) When ejecting the SD card, support it by hand since it may pop out. Failure to do so may cause a fall of the SD card leading to failure or damage of the card.
  • Page 76: Usb Memory

    6.2 USB Memory The USB memory is used to transmit the OS or project data and to save the data of the alarm history function. For details, refer to the following. 14. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY (PROGRAM/DATA CONTROL) 6.2.1 Applicable USB memory The following USB memories are applicable for GOT.
  • Page 77: Battery

    The battery backs up clock data and data stored in the built-in RAM (D drive) including alarm history, recipe data, time action setting value, advanced alarm, advanced recipe, logging, hard copy, and SRAM user area. A battery is installed to GT14 Handy when the GT14 Handy is shipped from the factory. 6.3.1 Applicable battery The following battery is applicable for GT14 Handy GOT.
  • Page 78 Remove the old battery from the holder and disconnect the connecter. Battery Disconnect the old battery connector and insert the new battery connector within 30s. Connector for Install the battery to the GOT. battery connection Insertion direction Battery Lead (Red) Lead (Black) Circuit board Attach the environmental protection back...
  • Page 79: Protective Sheet

    6.4 Protective Sheet The protective sheet is used to protect the operation surface from damage or dirt when the touch key of GOT display section is operated. For the Handy GOT, the protective sheet is attached for transportation. (It is different from the one described in this chapter.) 6.4.1 Applicable protective sheet Product name...
  • Page 80: Emergency Stop Switch Guard Cover

    6.5 Emergency Stop Switch Guard Cover The emergency stop SW guard cover is attached to prevent the emergency stop SW from being operated incorrectly. 6.5.1 Applicable emergency stop SW guard cover The following emergency stop SW guard cover is applicable for the Handy GOT. Product name Model Contents...
  • Page 81: Connector Conversion Box

    6.6 Connector Conversion Box The Connector Conversion Box is used to connect with the external connection devices such as PLC. 6.6.1 Applicable Connector Conversion Box The following Connector Conversion Box is applicable for the GT14 Handy. Product name Model Contents Packing for panel installation ×...
  • Page 82 (RS-232: D-Sub 9pin male) connector model name: Cannot be used. JES-9P-2A3A (JST) or equivalent When the GT14 Handy is used in the RS-232/RS-422 connection, use the connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S. External connection device communication 6.6.3 Connector Conversion Box (GT11H-CNB-37S)
  • Page 83  External dimensions of the connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-42S) 56 (2.21") 55 (2.17") 110 (4.34") about 65 (2.56") about 130 (5.12") * * Space required for connecting the cable Unit: mm (inch) External cable connected 6 - 11 6. OPTION 6.6 Connector Conversion Box...
  • Page 84  Installation of the connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-42S) The Connector Conversion Box can be installed on the panel face directly or on the DIN rail. (1) Mounting on the panel face (When setting the connector for Handy GOT connection and the power supply switch on the panel surface) (a) Direct mounting on the panel face Drill a mounting slot of the following Drill 4- 5±0.5...
  • Page 85 (2) Mounting on the panel face (When installing the Connector Conversion Box on the panel surface) (a) Direct mounting on the panel face Drill a mounting slot of the following size on the panel face. (b) Mounting on the panel face Install the Connector Conversion Box on the panel face (mounting surface).
  • Page 86  Wiring to the connector and the terminal block (1) Pin assignment and signal names The 42-pin connector of the external cable is converted to the PLC connection connector (module jack) and the following terminal block. Terminal block 1) Connector for Handy GOT External device Terminal block 2) 42pin Connector female...
  • Page 87 Terminal block 1) , 2) Terminal block 1) (Terminal block for power supply and emergency stop switch) Terminal block 2) (Terminal block for Handy GOT operation switches, grip switch, keylock switch) GT16H-CNB-42S GT16H-CNB-42S Terminal block 1) Application Terminal block 2) Application Terminal No.
  • Page 88 (2) Wiring to the terminal block Terminal screws are M3. Wire as described below. Do not tighten the terminal screws within the specified torque. Doing so can cause a failure or malfunction. 3.2 Terminal Solderless Terminal Solderless screw terminal screw terminal 6.2mm or less...
  • Page 89 POINT How to use the ID number recognition function • GT14 Handy acquires the ID number by using the RS-232 interface built in the GT14 Handy to connect with the connector conversion box via "MODBUS/RTU" connection. • Only when GT14 Handy connects with the connected equipment via Ethernet, the ID recognition function is available.
  • Page 90 Setting the ID number Set the ID number with the rotary switch of the Connector Conversion Box. Setting range is 0 to 255 (FF Set the second digit of the hexadecimal with "U", and the first digit of the hexadecimal with "L". After setting the ID number, turn the ID number valid/invalid selection switch to valid (ON).
  • Page 91 HINT HINT HINT Example of the station No. switching setting procedure using the ID recognition function of the connector conversion box. The following shows an example of the station No. switching setting procedure using the ID recognition function of the connector conversion box. Here, an example to set the station No. switching device value using the status observation function is explained.
  • Page 92 • Ethernet setting Set all PLCs which the GOT may be connected to via Ethernet. Here, an example when [N/W No.] is fixed to 1 is explained. • Station No. switching device setting Tick the check box of [Use Station No. Switching] to set the device specifying the station No. of the connected PLC. Here, an example when the GOT internal device GD500 is set is explained.
  • Page 93 (2) Set [Ordinary] to Observation Cycle in the Project tab and click [Add...]. (3) Set [ON] and [GB40] to Trigger 1 in the Trigger tab. • Operation setting Store the rotary switch value into the station No. switching device (GD500). The station No.
  • Page 94 (4) Click MODBUS in the Select CH No. screen to open the device setting window of MODBUS. (5) Input "3-00001" to Device. Select [Host] for Network. Click the [OK] button when settings are completed. "3-00001" is a fixed register to access to the rotary switch of the connector conversion box by the MODBUS communication.
  • Page 95 Set the project data to use the station No. switching. When [Screen] [Screen Property...] is selected, the Screen Property dialog box is displayed. Tick the check box of [Switch Station No.] in the [Basic] tab. Perform this operation in all screens where the station No. is switched. Place objects on the screen.
  • Page 96: Connector Conversion Box (Gt11H-Cnb-37S)

    6.6.3 Connector Conversion Box (GT11H-CNB-37S)  Part name and External dimensions Terminal block cover opened 82 (3.22") 37.5 (1.47") Terminal name: ES-3 Weight: Approx. 0.17kg Unit: mm (inch) Name Specifications Connector for Handy GOT (D-Sub,37pin,female type) Connects a Handy GOT through an external connection cable. connector model name: 17JE-13370-37(D23A)-FA (DDK) or equivalent Supplies the power to the Handy GOT.
  • Page 97  Installation The Connector Conversion Box can be installed on the panel face directly or with mounting bracket offered as an accessory. (1) Direct mounting on the panel face Drill a mounting slot of the following size on the panel face. 18 (0.7") 28 (1.1") 18 (0.7")
  • Page 98  Mounting with a mounting bracket (1) Attaching a mounting bracket Attach the provided mounting bracket to the Connector Conversion Box. Tighten the mounting screw with the specified torque. Tightening torque 0.49 to 0.68 N•m Mounting bracket (accessory) Mounting screw (accessory) M3 screw ×...
  • Page 99: Pin Assignment

     Pin assignment The 37-pin D-Sub connector of an external cable is converted into terminal blocks and a connector for PLC (D-Sub 9- pin type). Terminal block 1) Terminal block 2) Connector for PLC Connector for PLC RS-232 RS-422 D-Sub 9pin female D-Sub 9pin male M2.6 (Metric screw thread) M2.6 (Metric screw thread)
  • Page 100 (2) Terminal block 1) , 2) Terminal block 1) Terminal block 2) (Terminal block for power supply (Terminal block for emergency stop switch, and operation switches) grip switch, keylock switch) Terminal name: ES-3 *1 GT11H-CNB-37S GT11H-C-37P Application Connector for Handy GOT Terminal block D-Sub 37pin Signal name...
  • Page 101: Connector Conversion Box (Gt16H-Cnb-37S)

    6.6.4 Connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-37S)  External dimensions and part names 82 (3.22") 37.5 (1.47") Terminal block cover opened Unit: mm (inch) Weight: about 0.2kg Name Specifications Connector for Handy GOT connection (D-Sub 37pin (Female)) Connects the Handy GOT through an external cable. 17JE-13370-37(D23A)-FA (DDK) or equivalent Supplies the power to the Handy GOT.
  • Page 102  Installation The connector conversion box can be installed on the panel face directly or installed with the mounting fixtures. (1) Direct installation on the panel face Drill a mounting slot of the following size on the panel face. 18 (0.7") 28 (1.1") 18 (0.7") Drill 4-3.5...
  • Page 103  Installation with the mounting fixtures (1) Installing the mounting fixtures Install the supplied mounting fixtures to the connector conversion box. Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range. Tightening torque 0.49 to 0.68N•m Mounting bracket (accessory) Mounting screw (accessory) M3×3 (1) Installing on the panel face Install the connector conversion box on the panel face (mounting surface).
  • Page 104  Pin layout and signal names of the connector and the terminal block The D-Sub 37pin connector of the external cable is converted to the PLC connection connector (module jack) and the following terminal block. Terminal block 2) Terminal block 1) M2.6(Metric screw thread) External connection device communication connector...
  • Page 105 (1) Terminal block 1), 2) Terminal block 2) (Terminal block for emargency stop switch and selector switch) Terminal block 1) (Terminal block for power supply and Handy GOT operation switch) GT16H-CNB-37S GT11H-C-37P Application Connector for the Handy GOT connection Terminal block D-Sub 37pin Signal name 36, 37...
  • Page 106: With Wall-Mounting Attachment

    6.7 With wall-mounting Attachment The with wall-mounting Attachment is available to fix the handy GOT on the wall, stand or panel. 6.7.1 Applicable With wall-mounting Attachment The following With wall-mounting Attachment is applicable for Handy GOT. Product name Model Contents With wall-mounting Attachment GT14H-50ATT Mounting screw (M4-14), Nut (M4)
  • Page 107: Attachment Of Gt14 Handy Got

    6.7.3 Attachment of GT14 handy GOT The figure shows an image of attaching the GT14 handy GOT to the wall-hanging fixture. Post Post Panel surface Mounted image as viewed from the side 6 - 35 6. OPTION 6.7 With wall-mounting Attachment...
  • Page 108 6 - 36 6. OPTION 6.7 With wall-mounting Attachment...
  • Page 109: Installing Procedure

    INSTALLATION [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] WARNING • Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to/from the panel. • Always turn off the power ON/OFF switch on the connector conversion box before connecting or disconnecting the GOT to it.
  • Page 110: Hanging On A Wall

    7.1.2 Hanging on a wall When operating the Handy GOT with hanging on a wall, use the hook for hanging on a wall on the back. Hook for hanging on walls Load (approx. 1.5 to 5 kg) is applied to the wall depending on the weight of the GOT (approx. 0.79kg) main unit and the length of the connection cable.
  • Page 111: Installing To/Removing From Panel

    7.1.4 Installing to/removing from panel  Installing the Connector Conversion Box (GT16H-CNB-42S) on the panel (1) Overview The following describes the panel processing when the GOT is installed or removed by attaching a Connector Conversion Box to the control panel or operation panel. Handy GOT Control panel or operation panel...
  • Page 112  Installing the Connector Conversion Box (GT11H-CNB-37S or GT16H-CNB-37S) on the panel (1) Overview The following describes the panel processing when the GOT is installed or removed by attaching a Connector Conversion Box to the control panel or operation panel. Control panel or Handy GOT operation panel...
  • Page 113  Installing a relay cable connector on the panel (1) Overview The following describes the panel processing when the GOT is installed or removed by attaching a relay cable connector to the control panel or operating panel. Control panel or operation panel Handy GOT Refer to the next page2...
  • Page 114 (2) The panel cutting dimensions for relay cables To install the relay cable connector to the panel, make holes in the panel with the following dimensions. 63.5 (2.5") 2-3.2±0.1 59.1 (2.33") or more The part in gray indicates cut portions. (Panel thickness: 0.8 to 1.3 (0.031"...
  • Page 115: Overview Of Communication Cable

    COMMUNICATION CABLE 8.1 Overview of Communication Cable The following communication cables are available. Connector Conversion Box Controller Handy GOT Wiring of power supply, emergency stop switch, operation switch, etc. CC-Link External cable PLC connection cable Communication with PLC, Interface unit temperature controller, inverter, servo amplifier, etc.
  • Page 116 Name Model name Length Remark For FX PLC connection 1.5m GT11H-C15R4-8P (PLC side MINI-DIN 8pin) Relay cable For A/QnA CPU/FX1, FX2, FX2C PLC 1.5m GT11H-C15R4-25P (for connecting External cable and PLC) connection(PLC side D-sub 25pin) For Q CPU connection 1.5m GT11H-C15R2-6P (PLC side MINI-DIN 6pin) PLC connection cable...
  • Page 117 POINT POINT POINT Selection of the RS-232 connection, RS-422 connection, or Ethernet connection The Handy GOT can be connected to a controller in either of the RS-232 connection, RS-422 connection, or Ethernet connection. Select the RS-232 connection, RS-422 connection, or Ethernet connection by using the cable connector for the PLC communication in the environmental protection back cover.
  • Page 118: External Cable, Relay Cable

    8.2 External Cable, Relay Cable 8.2.1 Pin layout and signal names of the external cable (1) GT11H-C-37P (Use C or later version.), GT11H-C (Use C or later version.) GT11H-C -37P GT11H-C Arrangement of color (color type) Untied wire (31-core type) D-SUB 37pin (male) Dot mark type Colored...
  • Page 119: Pin Layout Of The Relay Cable

    8.2.2 Pin layout of the relay cable (1) GT11H-C15R4-8P relay cable (Use C or later version.) (FX0, FX0S, FX1S, FX0N, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC, FX3G(C), FX3U(C) PLCs-dedicated cable) Ferrite core 1 (equivalent to TOKIN ESD-R-14S) Ferrite core 2 (equivalent to TOKIN ESD-R-14S) 1.5m (4'11") Label For power supply Connecting to...
  • Page 120 (2) GT11H-C15R4-25P relay cable (Use C or later version.) (A, QnA, FX1, FX2, FX2C PLCs-dedicated cable) Ferrite core 1 (equivalent to TOKIN ESD-R-14S) Ferrite core 2 (equivalent to TOKIN ESD-R-14S) 1.5m (4'11") Label For power supply Connecting to For operation switches external cable To PLC D-Sub 25pin...
  • Page 121 (3) GT11H-C15R2-6P relay cable (Use C or later version.) (Q series PLC-dedicated cable) Ferrite core 1 (equivalent to TOKIN ESD-R-14S) Ferrite core 2 (equivalent to TOKIN ESD-R-14S) 1.5m (4'11") Label For power supply Connecting to For operation switches external cable To PLC MINI-DIN 6pin Ferrite core 3 (equivalent to TDK ZCAT3305-1330) For FG...
  • Page 122: Connector Specifications

    Installing and removing of external cable  Installation procedure of external cable (GT14 Handy and GT11H(S)-CCL side) Check that the 24VDC power to the external cable is OFF. Insert the connector adjusting the triangle marks of the main unit side connector and cable side connector.
  • Page 123  Installation procedure of external cable (Connector Conversion Box, GT16H-CNB-42S side) Check that the 24VDC power to the external cable is OFF. Insert the connector adjusting the triangle marks of the main unit side connector and cable side connector. After inserting the connector, push the lock lever. The connecters are locked after the lever is pushed into. ...
  • Page 124 8 - 10 8. COMMUNICATION CABLE 8.2 External Cable, Relay Cable...
  • Page 125 HANDLING OF POWER WIRING AND SWITCH [WIRING PRECAUTIONS] WARNING • Make sure to attach the back cover to the Handy GOT before turning on the power and starting operation after the installation or wiring work. Otherwise, electrical shock may be caused. •...
  • Page 126 POINT POINT POINT General preventive measures against noise There are two kinds of noises: Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines. Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to the following 3 points. (1) Protecting against noise (a) Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a highpower drive circuit.
  • Page 127: Internal Wiring Diagram Of Gt14 Handy

    9.1 Internal Wiring Diagram of GT14 Handy Each switch is wired inside the GT14 Handy as shown in the following diagram. DC24V+ Power supply Display unit DC24G Displa y circuit Display se ction SW-COM Touch panel Operation switch Control and...
  • Page 128: Power Wiring

    9.2 Power Wiring 9.2.1 Power wiring and grounding GOT power is supplied from the external power. In addition, the following table shows the input power supply voltage and the consumed current. Specifications Item GT1455HS-QTBDE GT1450HS-QMBDE Input power supply voltage DC24V (+10% -15%) Power consumption 8.4W or less (350mA/DC24V) 7.5W or less (310mA/DC24V)
  • Page 129: The Cause Of Malfunctions Related Wiring/Remedy

    9.2.2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring/Remedy Grounding of the GOT may cause electric potential difference and noise interference, which may result in GOT malfunctions. These problems may be resolved by taking the following measures.  Wiring path of the GOT's ground cable and power line Bundling the GOT's ground cable and power line together can cause interference noise, which may result in malfunctions.
  • Page 130 • Remedy 1 (Refer to the figures Remedy 1-1 and 1-2 below.) If the electric potential difference between the ground cable and the panel that houses the GOT is creating problems, connect the ground cable to the panel also. If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 1-1 is not feasible, follow Remedy 1-2. When using the connector conversion box Connector Connector...
  • Page 131 • Remedy 2 (Refer to the figures Remedy 2-1 and 2-2 below.) Attach a ferrite core to the cable if noise from the GOT panel has adverse effects on the GOT when Remedy 1 is taken. Wind the wire around the ferrite core several times (approx. 3 times), if a ferrite core is used. If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 2-1 is not feasible, follow Remedy 2-2.
  • Page 132: Wiring Inside And Outside The Panel

    9.3 Wiring inside and outside the panel 9.3.1 Wiring inside Run power lines, servo amplifier drive wires, and communication cables so that they do not cross each other. Noise interference that is generated by cables that cross each other may cause malfunctions. Surge suppressors are an effective way to filter out surge noise that is generated from no fuse breakers (NFB), electromagnetic contactors (MC), relays (RA), solenoid valves, and induction motors.
  • Page 133: Attaching Surge Killers To Control Equipment

    9.3.3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment If communication errors happen in synch with the on/off signals from certain control equipment (referred to as "load" hereafter) such as no fuse breakers, electromagnetic contactors, relays, solenoid valves, and induction motors, surge noise interference is suspected.
  • Page 134: Switch Wiring

    9.4 Switch Wiring 9.4.1 Overview for switch POWER LED Grip switch display LED Name Abbreviations Specifications Operation switch (6 switches) SW1 to SW6 Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact) Emergency stop switch ES-1, ES-2, ES-3 Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact) Grip switch DSW-1, DSW-2 Switch for external direct wiring (independent contact)
  • Page 135: Switch Wiring Example

    ES3B ES3B For setting emergency stop For avoiding emergency stop status when GT14 Handy is status when GT14 Handy is removed removed The internal contact is closed when the power switch of the connector conversion box is turned OFF or the Connector Conversion Box is not supplied with the power (POWER LED turns off.)
  • Page 136 (2) The connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S or GT16H-CNB-37S Connector GT14 Handy conversion box Terminal External block 1) cable SW-COM Terminal block 1) KSW-C KSW-1 KSW-2 DSW-1 DSW-1 DSW-2 DSW-2 ES-1 ES-1 ES-2 ES-2 ES-3 ES-3 9 - 12 9. HANDLING OF POWER WIRING AND SWITCH...
  • Page 137 ES3B ES3B For setting emergency stop For avoiding emergency stop status when GT14 Handy is status when GT14 Handy is removed removed The internal contact is closed when the power switch of the connector conversion box is turned OFF or the Connector Conversion Box is not supplied with the power (POWER LED turns off.)
  • Page 138 (2) The connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S or GT16H-CNB-37S Connector GT14 Handy conversion box External Terminal (Example of FX series) cable block 1) SW-COM X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 Terminal block 2) KSW-C X010 KSW-1 KSW-2 X011 X020 DSW-1 DSW-1...
  • Page 139: Operation Switch Wiring

    The operation switch is connected to the PLC through an external cable and the Connector Conversion Box.  Connection example (1) The connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S Connector GT14 Handy conversion box Terminal block 2) SW-COM (2) The connector conversion box GT11H-CNB-37S or GT16H-CNB-37S...
  • Page 140: Emergency Stop Switch Wiring

    When turning ON/OFF the external device power, set the load up to 24VDC/1A (contact specification). • For the emergency stop circuit, be sure to configurate the circuit outside the PLC. (The example of when the connector conversion box is used) Connector Connector GT14 Handy conversion box GT14 Handy conversion box Used as input...
  • Page 141 When avoiding to set the Connector Conversion Box to the emergency stop state while Handy GOT is removed GT14 Handy Connector conversion box Terminal block 1) Used as control signals of external device power ON/OFF ES-1 ES1A ES1B Internal contact...
  • Page 142 (b) When avoiding to set the Connector conversion box not to the emergency stop state while Handy GOT is removed GT14 Handy Connector conversion box Terminal block 2) Used as control signals of external device power ON/OFF ES-1 ES-1 ES-2...
  • Page 143: Grip Switch

    Grip switch wiring The grip switch is a switch with two circuits of the above 3-position system a contact.  Connection example (1) When using the connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-42S) GT14 Handy Connector conversion box Terminal block 2) Used as input...
  • Page 144  Pin layout Terminal No. Model name DSW-1 DSW-1 DSW-2 DSW-2 Terminal block 2) Terminal block 2) Terminal block 2) Terminal block 2) GT16H-CNB-42S Connector Conversion GT11H-CNB-37S Terminal block 2) Terminal block 2) Terminal block 2) Terminal block 2) GT16H-CNB-37S 9 - 20 9.
  • Page 145: Led Settings Of Grip Switch

    The following describes the connection example when the notch of the switch is set to the left. Set the load up to 24VDC/1A (contact specification) for each contact. Notch of the switch is set to the left (1) When using the connector conversion box (GT16H-CNB-42S) GT14 Handy Connector conversion box Terminal block 2) KSW-C KSW-1...
  • Page 146  Pin layout Terminal No. Model name KSW-C KSW-1 KSW-2 Terminal block 2) Terminal block 2) Terminal block 2) GT16H-CNB-42S Connector Conversion GT11H-CNB-37S Terminal block 2) Terminal block 2) Terminal block 2) GT16H-CNB-37S 9 - 22 9. HANDLING OF POWER WIRING AND SWITCH 9.4 Switch Wiring...
  • Page 147: Utility Execution

    10. UTILITY FUNCTION Utility is a function, which carries out connection of GOT and PLC, screen display and operation method settings, program/data control and self-check etc. For the utility function list, refer to the following. 10.2 Utility Function List 10.1 Utility Execution For utility execution, utility has to be displayed by installing BootOS and Standard monitor OS in the C drive (Flash memory).
  • Page 148: Utility Function List

    10.2 Utility Function List The items in the following list can be set/operated on the utility screens. Item Functions overview Reference Assigning channel numbers and communication drivers to communication interfaces Communication setting Communication Setting communication parameters setting Setting or deleting sequence program protection key words, canceling sequence program protection status (When connecting to FX series CPU) Ethernet setting Displaying the contents of Ethernet setting, changing the host...
  • Page 149 Item Functions overview Reference OS information Installing or uploading OS, displaying OS property, checking OS data 14.2.1 Deleting and copying alarm log files Alarm information 14.2.2 Converting alarm log files in G1A format CSV or TXT format Downloading, uploading, deleting or copying project files, displaying project Project information 14.2.3 file property, checking project file data...
  • Page 150: Utility Display

    10.3 Utility Display To display setting screens for each utility, the main menu must be displayed first. (1) Main menu The menu items that can be selected from the GOT utility are displayed. Touching a menu item in the main menu displays the setting screen or following selection screen for the item. (2) System message switch button This button switches the language used for the utility screen and system alarms.
  • Page 151 POINT POINT POINT When starting the GOT without selecting any language or the selected language and the installed fonts are not matched. The following screen is displayed. Touching the button of a desired language restarts the GOT and the language is switched to the selected one. HINT HINT HINT...
  • Page 152: Display Operation Of Main Menu

    10.3.1 Display operation of main menu The following four types of operation can display the main menu. (Display the main menu after installing the Standard monitor OS from GT Designer3 to the built-in flash memory of the GOT.) (1) When project data is undownloaded After the GOT is turned on, a dialog box for notifying of absence of project data is displayed.
  • Page 153 (3) When touching special function switch (utility) Touching the special function switch (utility) while user-created screen is displayed displays the main menu. The special function switch (utility) can be set as a touch switch that is displayed on a user-created screen by GT Designer3.
  • Page 154: Utility Basic Configuration

    10.3.2 Utility basic configuration The basic configuration of the screen is as follows. Title display Close/Return button Scroll key Screen (1) Title display The screen title name is displayed in title display part. Title display Title display (2) Close/Return button When a middle screen of the layers is displayed, if the (Close/return) button in the right corner of screen is touched, returns to the previous screen.
  • Page 155: Basic Operation Of Settings Change

    10.3.3 Basic operation of settings change  Change of setting value Setting item Select button Setting item Select button (1) Setting item, select button Touch the select button to change the settings. The setting methods differ depending on the setting items. The following types of setting method are available.
  • Page 156  Keyboard operation Touch the numerical value to be changed. Keyboard for numerical input is displayed and cursor is displayed simultaneously. The key board display position changes by the position of numerical value touched. (At the time of numerical input, displayed in the position which will not interrupt the inputting.) Cursor Keyboard Input numeric with keyboard.
  • Page 157: Communication Setting

    COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING (COMMUNICATION SETTING) In [Communication Setting], the communication interface names and the related communication channel, communication driver names display and channel numbers are set. Moreover, in [Communication Detail setting], the communication interface details are set. (Communication parameters setting). Function Description Reference...
  • Page 158: Communication Setting Contents

    (When changing a communication driver, the alternative communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance.) (2) Standard interface display BOX Display the communication interface included as standard in GT14 Handy. There are the following 4 types. RS-232 ....For communicating with controller RS-422 ....
  • Page 159 (The GT14 Handy cannot use Ch No.1 and Ch No.2 simultaneously.) Set when connecting with a bar code reader or RFID. (The GT14 Handy cannot to a bar code reader or a RFID.) Set when connecting with PC (drawing software).
  • Page 160: Communication Setting Operation

    11.1.4 Communication setting operation  Channel-Driver assign operation The following describes how to operate the Channel-Driver assign. The example of changing to the direct CPU connection (Communication driver: [A/QnA/L/QCPU, LJ71C24, QJ71C24]) for the GOT of the computer link connection (Communication driver: [AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6*]) is used. POINT POINT POINT...
  • Page 161 The screen returns to the [Channel-Driver assign] screen and touch the [OK] button. Touch [ ] button to return to the [Communication Setting] screen. Confirm that the selected communication driver ([A/ QnA/L/QCPU, L/QJ71C24]) is assigned. After confirming, touch the [OK] button. Touching the [ ] button restarts the GOT and the GOT operates with the changed settings.
  • Page 162  Assign Ethernet I/F operation The following describes how to operate the Ethernet I/F assign. The setting operation is same as that of the communication setting screen. Touch the [Assign Ethernet I/F] button in [Communication Setting]. After the screen shown left is displayed, touch the channel number specification menu BOX when changing the channel number.
  • Page 163: Communication Detail Setting

    11.2 Communication Detail Setting 11.2.1 Communication detail setting functions Function Description Communication parameters Set various communication parameters of communication devices. The settable parameters differ according to the setting communication device. Keyword Register For the FX series PLCs, key word for protecting program in the PLC can be set. Keyword Delete For the FX series PLCs, key word for protecting program in the PLC can be deleted.
  • Page 164  Assign Ethernet I/F Several drivers are assigned to the same Ethernet interface. However, only one GOT IP address is assigned per interface. By changing the settings of one interface, the GOT IP address, GOT port No. download, default gateway and subnet mask settings of other drivers, which are assigned to the same interface, are also changed.
  • Page 165: Display Contents Of Communication Detail Setting

    11.2.3 Display contents of Communication Detail setting The contents of communication detail setting varies according to driver type. This section explains setting items different from the communication detail setting of the drawing software. For setting items other than described in this section, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) ...
  • Page 166 When the registration is selected or the Regist key is touched on a PLC not compatible with the customer keyword, the keyboard for the keyword input is displayed in a pop-up window. When the keyword is input and the [Enter] key is touched, registration is completed. When [Keyword and Customer Keyword] is selected on the selection screen for the registration, the Customer Keyword entry screen of is displayed.
  • Page 167 POINT POINT POINT (1) Selection of keyword protection level For the devices which can perform the online operation of FX PLC, 3 levels of protection can be set. When the monitoring or setting change by online devices is needed, set the keyword taking the following into consideration.
  • Page 168 (2) Delete Registered keyword is deleted. Touching the [Delete] key pops up a keyboard for keyword input. When the correct keyword is input and the [Enter] key is touched, the keyword is deleted. Target PLC Setting FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to be deleted.
  • Page 169: Ethernet Setting

    11.3 Ethernet Setting 11.3.1 Ethernet setting functions The contents of the Ethernet setting in drawing software can be checked. The setting of the host station can be changed. For Ethernet setting, refer to the following. GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 11.3.2 Display operation of Ethernet setting Communication setting...
  • Page 170: Display Contents Of Ethernet Setting

    11.3.3 Display contents of Ethernet setting The following describes the setting items and the display contents of the Ethernet setting. (1) Channel selection tab Channels can be switched. Switching to the channel which does not have the Ethernet setting is not available. [*] is displayed on the tab of the channel whose setting is changed.
  • Page 171  Change of host Touch the device to be set as the host. Touch the [OK] button. Touching the [ ] button restarts the GOT and the GOT operates with the changed settings. 11 - 15 11. COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING (COMMUNICATION SETTING) 11.3 Ethernet Setting...
  • Page 172 11 - 16 11. COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING (COMMUNICATION SETTING) 11.3 Ethernet Setting...
  • Page 173: Display Setting

    12. DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS (GOT SET UP) Setting screen for display and setting screen for operation can be displayed from the utility screen. In the setting screen for display and the setting screen for operation, the following settings can be set. Item Description Reference...
  • Page 174 The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT. For details of the fonts, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) Setting 0 does not hide the title screen. The title screen is always displayed for 4 seconds or longer (which changes depending on the project data contents). 12 - 2 12.
  • Page 175: Display Operation Of Display

    POINT POINT POINT (1) Display setting by GT Designer3 Select [Common Settings] [GOT Environment Settings] [GOT Setup] from GT Designer3 to make the settings of opening screen time, screen save time and screen save backlight. To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data, change the setting at the display setting of GOT.
  • Page 176: Display Operations

    12.1.3 Display operations  Language Touching the setting items displays the Select Language screen. Touching the button of a desired language selects the language and returns the screen to the Display screen. Touching [OK] button defines the setting contents. Touching [ ] button without touching [OK] button displays the dialogue box shown on the left.
  • Page 177  Opening screen, screen save time Touching the setting time (numerical) displays the keyboard. Input numeric with the keyboard. Touching [OK] button defines the setting contents. Touching [ ] button without touching [OK] button displays the dialogue box shown on the left. [OK] button: The changed value is canceled, and the screen is closed.
  • Page 178  Brightness, contrast Touching the setting items displays the brightness contrast adjustment screen. Brightness can be adjusted by touching [+], [-] key of brightness adjustment. Touching [OK] button defines the setting contents. Touching [ ] button without touching [OK] button displays the dialogue box shown on the left.
  • Page 179: Operation Setting (Settings Regarding Operation)

    12.2 Operation Setting (Settings Regarding Operation) 12.2.1 Operation setting functions Setting regarding GOT operation can be set. The items which can be set are described below. Touching the each item part makes the respective setting become possible. Function Description Setting range OFF/SHORT/LONG Buzzer volume setting Buzzer volume setting can be changed.
  • Page 180: Display Operation Of Operation

    12.2.2 Display operation of Operation Main menu GOT setup 10.3 Utility Display) Touch Touch [GOT setup] [Operation] Operation Touch an item to change settings 12 - 8 12. DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS (GOT SET UP) 12.2 Operation Setting (Settings Regarding Operation)
  • Page 181: Setting Operation Of Operation

    12.2.3 Setting operation of operation  Buzzer volume, window move buzzer volume Touching the setting item changes the setting items. Touching [OK] button defines the setting contents. Touching [ ] button restarts the GOT and reflects the setting contents.  Security setting For the security setting operation, refer to the following.
  • Page 182: Security Level Change

    12.2.4 Security level change  Security level change functions Changes the security level to the same security level set by each object or screen switch. To change the security level, input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer3. Security level setting, Password setting....
  • Page 183  Security level change operation (1) Password input operation By touching [0] to [9] , [A] to [F] key, the password of the changed security level is input. When correcting the input character, touch [Del] key to delete the correcting character and input the password again.
  • Page 184: Utility Call Key Setting

    12.2.5 Utility Call Key Setting  Utility call key setting function The key position for calling the main menu of the utility can be specified. For the key position, 0 or 1 point can be specified from 4 corners on the screen. By keeping pressing the screen, a setting to switch the screen to the utility is available.
  • Page 185  Setting operation of utility call key Touch displayed at the 4 corners of the setting screen. The button repeats with every touch. Set the corner to be set to a key position to For the key position, 0 or 1 point only can be set. When setting 1 point, specify the time to switch to the utility in case of keeping pressing the key position.
  • Page 186: Adjusting The Touch Panel Position (Touch Panel Calibration)

    12.2.6 Adjusting the touch panel position (Touch panel calibration)  Touch panel calibration setting function Touch panel reading error can be corrected. Normally the adjustment is not required, however, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, correct the position with this function.
  • Page 187  Touch panel calibration operation Touch the point displayed on the screen with the finger one by one to make the setting. Touch the center of the displayed on the upper left precisely. Touch the point displayed on the upper right. Touch the point displayed on the lower left.
  • Page 188: Usb Mouse/Keyboard Setting

    12.2.7 USB mouse/keyboard setting  Function of USB mouse/keyboard To install and use the USB mouse/keyboard on the GOT, set the USB mouse/keyboard.  Display operation of USB mouse/keyboard Main menu GOT setup Operation 10.3 Utility Display) Touch Touch [GOT setup] [Operation] Touch [USB mouse/keyboard]...
  • Page 189 To move the mouse cursor to the touched position, touch the setting item of [Interlock with mouse cursor touch operation]. The setting content is changed by touching. (YES To use the USB keyboard, touch the setting item of [Use USB keyboard]. The setting content is changed by touching.
  • Page 190: Vnc(R) Server Function Setting

    12.2.8 VNC(R) server function setting  ® server function setting ® ® In the VNC server function setting, the authorization guarantee time for the VNC server function can be set. ® For the details of the VNC server function, refer to the following. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) Function Description...
  • Page 191: Transparent Mode Setting

    12.3 Transparent Mode Setting  Function of the transparent mode When using the multi-channel function, the channel No. of a controller to which the FA transparent function is executed can be specified. For the multi-channel function and FA transparent function, refer to the following manual. GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 Function Description...
  • Page 192: Backup/Restoration Setting

    12.4 Backup/Restoration Setting The storage location for backup data can be set. For how to use the backup/restoration, refer to the following manual. GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 Set the following items with touching the items on the GOT. Item Description Setting range...
  • Page 193  Setting operation of backup/restoration setting (1) Drive for backup setting, drive for backup data Touching the setting item changes the setting items. Touching [OK] button defines the setting contents. Touching [ ] button returns the screen to the [GOT Setup] screen.
  • Page 194: Trigger Backup Settings

     Trigger backup settings When the conditions of the trigger specified for each backup setting (Rise, Time) are met, the GOT automatically backs up data. How to use the trigger backup, refer to the following manual. GOT1000 Series Extended/Option Functions Manual for GT Works3 ...
  • Page 195: Behavior Of Duplicate Ips

    12.5 Behavior of Duplicate IPs  Setting function for Behavior of duplicate IPs The GOT operation can be set when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards. Function Description Setting range Maintain a network connection(rec) Behavior of duplicate...
  • Page 196  Display operation of Behavior of duplicate IPs Main Menu GOT setup 10.3 Utility Display) Touch [GOT setup] Touch [Behavior of duplicate IPs] Behavior of duplicate IPs  Setting operation of Behavior of duplicate IPs Touching the setting item changes the setting items. •...
  • Page 197 POINT POINT POINT (1) Precautions for selecting [Do not maintain a network connection] When selecting [Do not maintain a network connection], the GOT is disconnected from the network at the addition of a device with the same IP address as the GOT. Therefore, there is a possibility that the running GOT cannot be communicated by IP address setting mistakes or intended actions by malicious users, and the system control may be influenced by those errors.
  • Page 198: License Management

    12.6 License Management For using functions which require a license, register the license for the GOT. For releasing a registered license for the GOT, also execute on the license management screen. Item Description Setting range ® ® server function Registers/deletes the license of the VNC server function.
  • Page 199  Setting operation of License management (1) When registering a license number for the GOT Touch the license number input area on the license management screen, and then the keyboard appears on the bottom of the screen. Touch the [Regist] button to register the input license number.
  • Page 200 12 - 28 12. DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS (GOT SET UP) 12.6 License Management...
  • Page 201: Time Setting And Display

    13. CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY (TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY) Setting items for clock display can be displayed from the GOT utility screen. 13.1 Time Setting and Display 13.1.1 Time setting and display functions Time settings and displaying of the status of GOT built-in battery are possible. Function Description Reference...
  • Page 202: Operation Of Time Setting

     Operation of time setting (1) Clock setting Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT clock data and the clock data of controller connected to the GOT. It is same as set in the GOT setup in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) Setting Description...
  • Page 203 (2) Clock display Carry out the display and setting of GOT clock data. The setup methods of clock data are shown below. Touching the clock display section displays the keyboard for input and stops the clock update. Input time with the keyboard by referring to the table below.
  • Page 204 13 - 4 13. CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY (TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY) 13.1 Time Setting and Display...
  • Page 205: Data Storage Location

    14. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY (PROGRAM/DATA CONTROL) The display of OS, project data or alarm data which is written in the GOT or SD card and the data transmission between GOT and SD card/USB memory are possible. The format of the SD card/USB memory is also possible. 14.1 Data Storage Location 14.1.1 Data type and storage location ...
  • Page 206  At maintenance Read C drive D drive (Built-in flash memory) (Built-in SRAM) Alarm Hard copy Copy Copy Recipe GT Designer3 Alarm Alarm Logging Hard copy Hard copy Copy files on A drive E drive Windows (Standard SD card) (USB drive) Alarm Hard copy Recipe...
  • Page 207: Os Version Confirmation

    Example H/W version: H Boot OS version: AD Rating plate: HD BootOS BootOS MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Version Version 14 - 3 14. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY (PROGRAM/DATA CONTROL) 14.1 Data Storage Location...
  • Page 208: Capacity Confirmation Of The Project Data Downloading Location

    14.1.3 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location When download the project data, confirm the capacity of the user area in the drive to which transferred, the transferred project data size, the transfer size and buffering area size of the optional function OS in advance to judge whether to carry out the download.
  • Page 209: Various Data Control

    14.2 Various Data Control 14.2.1 OS information  Function of OS information Each file name/folder name of BootOS and OS (Standard monitor OS, PC communication driver and Option OS) by which each drive (A: Built-in SD card, C: Built-in flash memory, E: USB memory) holds can be displayed in lists. Installation and uploading of the files are also possible.
  • Page 210: Display Example Of Os Information

     Display example of OS information OS information OS information Storage file/folder display screen Number Item Description The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected. Select drive When the SD card is not installed, [A:Built-in SD card] is not displayed. If the USB memory is not installed, [E: USB drive] is not displayed.
  • Page 211  OS information operation (1) Display operation of OS information Touching a drive in [Select drive] displays the information of the first folder of the touched drive. Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder. Touching a folder name of [ . . ] displays the information of the folder in one upper hierarchy.
  • Page 212 (2) Installation operation BootOS and OS which are written in the A drive (built-in SD card) or E drive (USB drive) can be installed in GOT. (This item explains using the A drive.) Install the SD card to which the BootOS or OS to install is written to the GOT.
  • Page 213 (3) Upload operation BootOS and OS in the C drive (Flash Memory) can be uploaded to the A drive (Built-in SD card) and E drive (USB drive). The SD card after uploading can be used for installing the OS on another GOT. 17.
  • Page 214 (4) Property display operation Displays the property of the file stored in the selected folder. Touching [Property] button after selecting the property displaying target folder displays the [Property] screen shown left. In the [Property] screen, the following information is displayed for each file selected by Item Description Name...
  • Page 215: Alarm Information

    14.2.2 Alarm information  Function of alarm information The extended alarm log file or alarm log file held by each drive (A: Built-in SD card, C: Flash Memory, D: Internal SRAM, E: USB drive) is displayed. The functions below can be carried out for files. The USB drive only stores log files, and cannot be displayed.
  • Page 216  Display example of Alarm information Alarm information screen Alarm information: Storage file/folder display screen Number Item Description The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected. When SD card or USB memory is not installed, the following drives are not displayed. Select drive •...
  • Page 217  Alarm information operation (1) Display operation of Alarm information Touching a drive of [Select drive] displays the Alarm information screen information of the touched drive. Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder. Touching a folder of [ . . ] displays the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy.
  • Page 218 (2) G1A CSV conversion operation, G1A TXT conversion operation The selected G1A file is converted to CSV file or TXT file. Touch and select the G1A file to convert into a CSV file or a TXT file. (Example: When [G1A CSV] button is touched) The following dialog box is displayed when touching the following button according to the file type to...
  • Page 219 (3) Deletion operation Deletes selected files. Touch and select the file to delete. Touching [Delete] button displays the dialog mentioned left. Touching [OK] button deletes the file. Touching [Cancel] button cancels the deletion. When the deletion is completed, the completion dialog is displayed.
  • Page 220 (4) Copy operation Copies the selected file. Touch and select the file to copy. Touching [Copy] button displays the message Dialog for selecting a copy destination drive [Please select a destination.] in the left bottom of the screen. If the copy destination folder is touched, the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination.
  • Page 221: Project Information

    14.2.3 Project Information  Function of project information The project data files stored in each drive (A: Built-in SD card, C: Flash Memory, E: USB memory) can be displayed by lists. In addition, the files can be downloaded, uploaded, deleted or copied, etc. Function Description Reference...
  • Page 222: Display Example Of Project Information

     Display example of Project information Project information Project information Storage file/folder display screen Number Item Description The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected. Select drive When the SD card is not installed, [A:Built-in SD card] is not displayed. If the USB memory is not installed, [E: USB drive] is not displayed.
  • Page 223  Operation of project information (1) Display operation of Project information Touching a drive in Select drive displays the project data in the drive. Touching project data selects and inverts it. For operation of delete, copy, property, data check, download, upload, refer to the following. Delete........
  • Page 224 (3) Copy operation Uploads the project data written in the C drive (Flash Memory) to the A drive (Built-in SD card)/E drive (USB drive). • Copying to another directory in the same drive • Copying between A drive and E drive Copy to/from C drive or copy to C drive/D drive is disabled.
  • Page 225 Touch [OK] button. If there is no file of the same name in the copy destination folder, starts to copy. When there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder, the dialog mentioned left is displayed without starting the copy. If copy, in this case, the copied file is overwritten to the project data in the copy destination folder.
  • Page 226 (5) Data check operation Carries out data check of the selected project file. Touch [Data check] button after selecting a data When data is normal. check target file. The dialog mentioned left will be displayed after executing data check. Touching [OK] button closes the dialog. When data is erroneous.
  • Page 227 Mount the SD card/USB memory to GOT. For the SD card installation/removal method, refer to the following. 6.1.2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 6.2.2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory Touch [A: Built-in SD card] of [Select drive]. Touching [Download] button displays the screen shown on the left.
  • Page 228 (a) Setup operation Sets the project data stored in the A drive (Built-in SD card) to be used in the GOT. The GOT monitors using the monitor data in the A drive. POINT POINT POINT Before setup operation When storing project data from GT Designer3 to SD card, select [A: Standard SD Card] for [Project Data] in [Boot Drive].
  • Page 229 (7) Upload/setup cancel operation (a) Upload operation By upload operation, the project data is transferred from the C drive (Flash Memory) to the A drive (Build-in SD card) or E drive (USB drive). The SD card or USB memory after uploading can be used for downloading project data to another GOT. (This item explains using the A drive.) POINT POINT...
  • Page 230 (b) Setup cancel operation By setup cancel, setup is canceled. Touch [A: Built-in SD card] of [Select drive]. Touching [Upload] button displays the screen shown on the left. Touching [OK] button executes the setup cancel. When the setup cancel is completed, the dialog box mentioned left is displayed.
  • Page 231: Hard Copy Information

    14.2.4 Hard copy information  Function of hardcopy information Carries out delete, copy and move to the file created by the hardcopy function. For details of hard copy function, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) Function Description Reference...
  • Page 232  Display example of Hardcopy information Hard copy information Hard copy information Storage file/folder display screen Number Item Description The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected. When SD card or USB memory is not installed, the following drives are not displayed. Select drive •...
  • Page 233  Hardcopy information operation (1) Display operation of Hardcopy information Touching a drive of [Select drive] displays the information of the touched drive. Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder. Touching a folder of [ . . ] displays the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy.
  • Page 234 (2) Deletion operation Deletes selected files. Touch and select the file to delete. Touching [Del] button displays the screen mentioned left. Touching [OK] button deletes the file. Touching [Cancel] button cancels the deletion. When the deletion is completed, the completion dialog is displayed.
  • Page 235 (3) Copy operation Copies the selected file. Touch and select the file to copy. Touching [Copy] button displays the message [Please select a destination.] in the left bottom of the screen. If the copy destination folder is touched, the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination.
  • Page 236 (4) Rename operation Renames the selected file. Touch and select the file to change the name. Touching [Rename] button displays the screen shown left. Input the file name to be changed. By touching the following button, input text type is changed.
  • Page 237: Advanced Recipe Information

    14.2.5 Advanced recipe information POINT POINT POINT Before using advanced recipe information For writing/reading into/from a controller with this function or editing of advanced recipe file on the personal computer, refer to the following manual. Specifications and operating procedure are described. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) ...
  • Page 238  Display operation of Advanced Recipe information Main menu Program/data control 10.3 Utility Display) Touch Touch [Program/data control] [Advanced Recipe information] Advanced Recipe information 14 - 34 14. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY (PROGRAM/DATA CONTROL) 14.2 Various Data Control...
  • Page 239  Display example of Advanced Recipe information (1) Advanced recipe information screen Advanced Recipe Information Advanced Recipe Information screen Storage file/folder display screen Number Item Description Select drive The target drive can be selected. (Even if SD card is not installed, this message appears.) Indicates the type of the displayed name (file or folder).
  • Page 240 (2) Advanced recipe record list screen Touching the [Execute] button on the advanced recipe information screen after selecting the advanced recipe file, this screen appears. Records selected in each advanced recipe file can be displayed or saved/loaded. Number Item Description Record No.
  • Page 241  Advanced recipe information operation (1) Display operation of Advanced Recipe information Touching a drive of [Select drive] displays the information of the touched drive. Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder. Touching a folder name of [ . . ] displays the information of the folder in one upper hierarchy.
  • Page 242 (2) G1P CSV conversion operation, G1P TXT conversion operation Advanced recipe file (G1P file) is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed/edited on personal computer. Touch and select the G1P file to convert into a CSV file or a Unicode text file.
  • Page 243 (3) CSV/TXT G1P conversion operation CSV file or Unicode text file is converted to an advanced recipe file (G1P file). To select the file, touch the check box of CSV file or Unicode text file to be converted to a G1P file. Select the target folder.
  • Page 244 (4) Deletion operation Folder and file to be used on advanced recipe are deleted. Touch and select the file/folder to delete. Touching [Del] button displays the dialog mentioned left. Touching [OK] button deletes the file/folder. (While executing, "Processing..."message appears on the screen.) Touching [Cancel] button cancels the deletion.
  • Page 245 (5) Copy operation Folder to be used in advanced recipe is copied. Touch and select the file to copy. Touch the [Copy] button. Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive.) At this time, it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists.
  • Page 246 (6) Move operation Files to be used in advanced recipe are moved. Touch and select the file to move. Touch the [Move] button. Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive.) Touching [Execute] button displays the dialog box shown left.
  • Page 247 (7) Rename operation File name to be used in advanced recipe is changed. Touch and select the file to change the name. Touching [Rename] button displays the screen shown left. Input the file name to be changed. By touching the following button, input text type is changed.
  • Page 248 (8) Folder create operation Folder to be used in advanced recipe is created. Touch the [Create Folder] button. The input key window shown left appears, then input the file name to be created. By touching the following button, input text type is changed.
  • Page 249 (9) G1P file create operation Advanced recipe file (G1P file) is created. When advanced recipe is only executed on Utility, advanced recipe file should be created with this function in advance. Touch the [Create G1P] button. The screen to select the advanced recipe setting is displayed.
  • Page 250 When the file, whose name is the same, exists in the destination folder, the dialog box shown left appears without starting the creation. Touching the [OK] button overwrites the file. Touching [Cancel] button cancels creating. When creating is completed, completion dialog box is displayed.
  • Page 251 (10) Record load operation Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller. Select the recipe file and touch the [Execute] button. As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed, select the record comment to which you want to load the device value. Touching the [Load record GOT PLC] button displays the dialog box shown left.
  • Page 252 (11) Record save operation Device value of a controller is saved in the selected record. Select the recipe file and touch the [Execute] button. As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed, select the record comment for saving the device value.
  • Page 253 (12) Record match operation Verifies weather selected record matches to the device value of the controller. After executing loading/saving with advanced recipe, verifies weather its contents are reflected. Select the recipe file and touch the [Execute] button. As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed, select the record comment for matching the device value.
  • Page 254 (13) Device value delete operation The device value of selected record is deleted (without value) and changed to record only for reading. (The record name is not deleted.) Select the recipe file and touch the [Execute] button. As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed, select the record comment to be deleted.
  • Page 255  Precautions (1) When creating folder/file (a) Number of characters set for folder or file name when creating folder/file. GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below. Specify folder or file name, and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters. Users only can rename folder or file name.
  • Page 256 (2) Precautions for operation (a) Precautions during folder/file operation (Create/Delete/Copy/File output, etc) Even if SD card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files, the processing continues to be executed. (Example: Even if SD card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder, the folder is created.) Therefore, do not pull out the SD card while the "Processing..."...
  • Page 257: Logging Information

    14.2.6 Logging information  Function of logging information Logging files created with the logging function can be copied, deleted or renamed, etc. Without using a PC, you can manage logging files on the GOT. For details of the logging function, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) Function Description...
  • Page 258  Display example of Logging information Logging Information Logging Information Storage file/folder display screen Number Item Description Select drive The target drive can be selected. (Even if SD card is not installed, this message appears.) Indicates the type of the displayed name (file or folder). Kind In case of file, displays the extension;...
  • Page 259  Logging information operation (1) Display operation of logging information Touching a drive of [Select Drive] displays the information of the touched drive. Touching a folder name displays the information of the touched folder. Touching a folder name of [ . . ] displays the information of the folder in one upper hierarchy.
  • Page 260 (2) Operation of G1L CSV conversion G1L TXT conversion Logging file (G1L file) is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed/edited on PC. Touch and select the G1L file to convert into a CSV file or a Unicode text file. Touch the following button in accordance with destination file type.
  • Page 261 (3) Deletion operation Folder and file to be used on logging are deleted. Touch and select the file/folder to delete. Touching [Del] button displays the dialog mentioned left. Touching [OK] button deletes the file/folder. (While executing, "Processing..."message appears on the screen.) Touching [Cancel] button cancels the deletion.
  • Page 262 (4) Copy operation Folder to be used in logging is copied. Touch and select the file to copy. Touch the [Copy] button. Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive.) At this time, it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists.
  • Page 263 (5) Move operation An operation log file is moved. Touch and select the file to move. Touch the [Move] button. Select the target folder. (Selecting a folder is not needed for moving directly below the drive.) Touching [Execute] button displays the dialog box shown left.
  • Page 264 (6) Rename operation An operation log file is changed. Touch and select the file to change the name. Touching [Rename] button displays the screen shown left. Input the file name to be changed. By touching the following button, input text type is changed.
  • Page 265 (7) Folder create operation An operation log folder is created. Touch the [Create Folder] button. The input key window shown left appears, then input the file name to be created. By touching the following button, input text type is changed. [A-Z]: English capital [0-9]: Numeric/Symbol Touching [Enter] button displays the dialog box...
  • Page 266  Precautions (1) When creating folder/file (a) Number of characters set for folder or file name when creating folder/file. GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below. Specify folder or file name, and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters. Users only can rename folder or file name.
  • Page 267: Memory Card Format

    14.2.7 Memory card format  Function of the memory card format Format the SD card/USB memory/Internal SRAM.  Display operation of Memory card Format Main menu Program/Data control 10.3 Utility Display) Touch [Memory card Format] Touch [Program/data control] Move to Memory card format Memory card Format 14 - 63 14.
  • Page 268  Memory card format operation Mount the SD card/USB memory to GOT. For inserting/removing method of SD card/USB memory, refer to the following. 6.1.2 Installing and removing procedures of the SD card 6.2.2 Installing and removing procedures of the USB memory Touch and select the drive to format by drive selection.
  • Page 269: Memory Information

    14.2.8 Memory information  Memory information functions Displays the flash memory empty area size available for the user of each drive and Boot drive empty area size. Confirming memory empty space is enabled without connecting a PC.  Display operation of Memory information Main menu Program/Data control 10.3 Utility Display)
  • Page 270: Usb Device Status Display

    14.2.9 USB device status display  Function of USB device status display This function displays a list of the USB device connection status in the GOT. Also, this screen is used to remove the USB device from GOT.  Display operation of USB device status display Main menu Program/Data control 10.3 Utility Display)
  • Page 271  USB device status display operation When the USB device is installed to GOT, the screen shown left is displayed. USB mass storage is displayed in Device, and [Stop] button is displayed in Attach. Touching the [Stop] button displays the dialog box shown left.
  • Page 272: Sram Control

    14.2.10 SRAM control  Function of SRAM control The SRAM user area usage can be confirmed, data in the SRAM user area can be backed up or restored, and the SRAM user area is initialized. For the available functions in the SRAM user area, refer to the following. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) ...
  • Page 273  Display example of SRAM control (6) (7) (10) (12) (11) (13) (14) Number Item Description Check box Touch the check box to select or clear the item. Displays the used functions in the order of the advanced system alarm, advanced user alarm, and logging Function name function.
  • Page 274  SRAM control operation (1) Operation to initialize all or selected areas of the SRAM user area Perform any of the following operations. • To initialize all areas of the SRAM user area, touch the [Initialize all] button. • To initialize selected areas of the SRAM user area, select the check box of the area to be initialized, and then touch the [Initialize selected area] button.
  • Page 275 (2) Operation to restore data To restore data in the drive to the SRAM user area Select the drive where the data is stored, and then touch the [Restoration] button. The dialog box shown left appears. Check the description of the dialog box. To restore all data in the SRAM user area, touch the [OK] button.
  • Page 276 (3) Operation to back up all data in the SRAM user area To back up data in the SRAM user area to a drive Select the drive where the data is to be stored, and then touch the [Backup all area] button. The dialog box shown left appears.
  • Page 277: Got Data Package Acquisition

    14.2.11 GOT data package acquisition  GOT data package acquisition function The GOT data package acquisition copies the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the SD card or USB memory. • OS (Boot OS, standard monitor OS, communication driver, extended function OS, option OS) •...
  • Page 278: Operator Information Management

    14.2.12 Operator information management  Operator management (1) Operator management function The function enables displaying a list of the operator information and adding, changing, or deleting the operator information to be used. A password for operator authentication can be changed when the password is out of date. Functions for the operator authentication (automatic logout time, authentication method, password expiration date, etc.) can be set.
  • Page 279 (3) Display example of operator management (a) Operator information management screen Item Description Operator Name Displays operator names. Displays operator IDs. Level Displays security levels for operators. Update Displays the last updated dates of the operator information. Operation keys Execution keys for each function Displays and sets the storage location for imported and exported operator information.
  • Page 280 (External authentication ID setting range: alphanumerics*4 to 32 digits) Ext.auth. ID ■ Function setting Since the GT14 Handy is not connectable with RFID, it does not correspond to the external authentication function. 14 - 76 14. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY (PROGRAM/DATA CONTROL)
  • Page 281 (4) Operator management operation Touch [Operator management] in the operator setting menu. The Admin password authentication screen is displayed, and then input the administrator password. Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons. : Alphabet capital : Alphabet small letter : Numeric When the input is completed, touch the [Enter] key.
  • Page 282 (a) Add operation Add operator information to the GOT. Touch the [Add] button. The Operator information edit screen is displayed, and then touch an item to be edited. (a) OperatorName (b) OperatorID (c) Level (d) Password (e) Make a permanent password (f) Use ext.
  • Page 283 For changing passwords during editing, touch the password. The New password input dialog box is displayed, and then input a password. When the input is completed, touch the [Enter] key. When the password input is completed, the New password input confirmation dialog box is displayed.
  • Page 284 (b) Edit operation Edit the operator information stored in the GOT. Select the operator information to be edited with touching the operator information. Touch the [Edit] button. The Operator information edit screen is displayed, and then touch an item to be edited. (a) Level (b) Password (c) Make a permanent password...
  • Page 285 (c) Delete operation Delete the operator information stored in the GOT. Select the operator information to be deleted with touching the operator information. Touch the [Delete] button, and then the dialog box shown left is displayed. Touch the [OK] button, and then the selected operator information is deleted.
  • Page 286 (d) Undo operation Restore the current operator information to the previous saved one. Touch the [Undo] button. The dialog box shown left is displayed, and then touch the [OK] button. The Admin password authentication screen is displayed, and then input the administrator password.
  • Page 287 (e) Import operation Import the operator information that is already exported to a SD card to the GOT Touch the [Import] button. The dialog box shown left is displayed. Touch button, and then the Admin password authentication screen is displayed. Input the administrator password.
  • Page 288 Export operation Export the operator information stored in the GOT to a SD card Touch the [Export] button. The dialog box on the left is displayed. Touch the following buttons according to the output format for the file. Binary file: button Binary CSV file:...
  • Page 289  Password change (1) Password change function The passwords to be used for the operator authentication can be changed. For the password change, log into the GOT in advance with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed. (2) Display operation of password change Main menu Debug &...
  • Page 290 (3) Password change operation Log into the GOT with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed on the Main Menu screen for the utility. Touch [Password change] in the operator setting menu, and then the Password change dialog box is displayed.
  • Page 291: Function Setting

    Set the valid byte count for external authentication ID. (2 to 16 bytes) 14-89 Valid byte count input Since the GT14 Handy is not connectable with RFID, it does not correspond to the external authentication function. (2) Display operation of function setting Main menu Debug &...
  • Page 292 (3) Function setting operation Touch [Function setting] in the operator setting menu, and then the Admin password authentication dialog box is displayed. Input the administrator password. Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons. : Alphabet capital : Alphabet small letter : Numeric When the input is completed, touch the [Enter]...
  • Page 293 (c) Touch [Password expiration date], and then the Password expiration date edit dialog box is displayed. Input the expiration date. When the input is completed, touch the [Enter] key. (d) Initial position input Set the initial position input (byte count) of external authentication ID from among the data read from the external authentication device.
  • Page 294: Display Example Of Got Data Package Acquisition

     Display example of GOT data package acquisition Number Item Description Displays the drive where OS and data can be copied. Select drive The [A: Built-in SD card] is not displayed when SD card is not installed. If the USB memory is not installed, [E: USB drive] is not displayed. Copy Touching the button starts copying.
  • Page 295 After copying OS and data, the dialog box for notifying the completion appears. Touching the [OK] button closes the dialog box. POINT POINT POINT Estimation of processing time The time required for the processing depends on conditions such as OS, data capacity, and file structure. (Reference value) •...
  • Page 296 14 - 92 14. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY (PROGRAM/DATA CONTROL) 14.2 Various Data Control...
  • Page 297: Debug

    15. GOT SELF CHECK (DEBUG AND SELF CHECK) The GOT can display the screen for debugging and self-checking. The following describes the functions available as the debugging and self checking functions. Item Description Reference Debug System monitor, A list editor, FX list editor, Backup/restoration 15-1 Self check Memory check, Display check, Touch panel check, I/O check, Ethernet status check...
  • Page 298: Backup/Restoration

    15.1.4 Backup/restoration  Display operation of Backup/restoration Main Menu Debug & self check Debug 10.3 Utility Display) Touch [Debug] Touch [Backup/restoration] Touch [Debug & self check] Backup/restoration function  Operation of Backup/restoration Backup/restore data from the controller to GOT, or delete backup data with the backup/restoration. GOT data package acquisition is also possible.
  • Page 299: Self Check

    15.2 Self Check The following describes the functions available as the self check function. Item Description Reference Carries out write/read check of the SD card, USB memory, built-in flash memory, or internal SRAM. Memory check 15-3 5 9 2 0 [Password] Drawing check Carries out missing bit check, color check and drawing check.
  • Page 300  Memory check operation Carries out write/read check of memory. POINT POINT POINT When drive is not displayed When the drive (memory) to check is not displayed, confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following. 6.1 SD Card 6.2 USB Memory When no faults are found in mounting, etc, a memory failure may be arisen.
  • Page 301 POINT POINT POINT (1) Password change The password cannot be changed. When input password error, the cancel dialog box is displayed. Touching [OK] returns to the Memory check screen. (2) When error is found in memory When error is found by memory check, the dialog box indicating the area in which the error occurred is displayed.
  • Page 302: Drawing Check

    15.2.2 Drawing check  Drawing check function The drawing check function carries out display checks as missing bit check, color check, basic figure display check, move check among screens.  Display operation of drawing check Main Menu Debug & self check Self check 10.3 Utility Display) Touch...
  • Page 303  Drawing check operation The screen for drawing check can be displayed by touching [Drawing check] on the Display check menu. (1) Before execute drawing check Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during drawing check. Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the [Display check] screen.
  • Page 304 (c) Move check among screens • Pattern 1: Shape transformation, color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals. If the shape and color are displayed visually in order, it is normal To Pattern 2 Pattern 1 •...
  • Page 305 • Pattern 3: Shape transformation, color check The overlapped shapes of pattern 1 and pattern 2 are displayed. If the shape and color are displayed visually in order, it is normal. To Pattern 4 • Pattern 4: Shape check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals. If the shape and interval are displayed visually in order, it is normal.
  • Page 306: Font Check

    15.2.3 Font check  Font check function The font check is a function which confirms fonts installed in GOT. The character data of the font is displayed on the upper left part of the screen one by one.  Display operation of Font check Main Menu Debug &...
  • Page 307  Font check operation Font check starts by touching [Font Check] in the [Display check] screen. The character data of the built-in font (in the built-in flash memory) can be checked visually to confirm the font drawings by displaying the character data serially on the screen. (1) Before execute font check Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during Font check.
  • Page 308: Touch Panel Check

    15.2.4 Touch panel check  Touch panel check function Touch panel check function checks whether there are no dead zone area in 2 dots 2 dots.  Display operation of Touch panel check Main menu Debug & self check Self check 10.3 Utility Display) Touch Touch...
  • Page 309  Touch panel check operations Touching [Touch panel check] of self-check displays a black-filled screen over the entire screen area. Touch a part of the screen. The touched part becomes a yellow-filled display. Black-filled screen Yellow color Touching the upper left part returns to the self-check. Upper-left touch position POINT POINT...
  • Page 310: I/O Check

    15.2.5 I/O check  I/O check function The I/O check is a function which checks whether GOT and PLC can communicate with each other. If I/O check ends normally, the communication interface and the connection cable hardware are normal. To execute I/O check, the communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance from GT Designer3. Note that the GOT restarts when this function is performed.
  • Page 311  I/O check operation (1) Connecting target confirmation Touching [CPU] button carries out the connecting target confirmation communication check. After the CPU communication starts normally, the dialog box mentioned left notifying that it is on checking, until the connecting target confirmation communication ends normally.
  • Page 312 (2) Self-loopback Touching [Self] carries out the hardware check of RS-232 interface. For preparation for the self-loopback communication When use a connector conversion box check, insert the connector for self-loopback check (Customer purchased) shown in the diagram left in Connector the RS-232 interface.
  • Page 313 When the all checks ended normally, the dialog box shown left is displayed. And the GOT restarts in five seconds. When an error occurs, the dialog box that shows the GOT abnormal termination and the byte with the error appears, and then the GOT restarts in five seconds.
  • Page 314: Ethernet Status Check

    15.2.6 Ethernet status check  Ethernet status check function Ethernet status check is a function that sends a ping to check the connection status with the equipment on the Ethernet.  Display operation of Ethernet status check Main menu Debug & self check Self check 10.3 Utility Display) Touch...
  • Page 315  Operation of Ethernet status check If touch the select button of [IP address of the other terminal], a keyboard is displayed. Enter the IP address of the other terminal with the keyboard. <Default: 192.168.3.39> If touch the [Ping transmission] button, a ping is sent to the IP address entered in [IP address of the other station].
  • Page 316: System Alarm Display

    15.3 System Alarm Display  System alarm function System alarm is the function to display error code and error message when an error occurs in GOT, controller or network. System alarms can be reset on the System alarm display screen. For details of system alarm, refer to the following manual.
  • Page 317  Operation of system alarm display (1) System alarm display resetting Eliminate each cause of the system alarm being occurred. Error causes can be identified by the error code, error message and channel No. displayed on the System alarm screen. 20.
  • Page 318: Got Start Time

    15.4 GOT start time  GOT start time function GOT start time is the function to display the following date and time. • Start time of GOT • Current time of GOT • Operating hours of GOT  Display operation of GOT start time Main Menu Debug &...
  • Page 319  Display of GOT start time Item Description Displays the time when the GOT was powered on or reset-restarted (OS installation, communication setting Start Time change). Current Time Displays the current time. Displays operating hours of the GOT. The displayed operating hours is the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset-restarted (OS Operating hours installation, communication setting change).
  • Page 320 15 - 24 15. GOT SELF CHECK (DEBUG AND SELF CHECK) 15.4 GOT start time...
  • Page 321 16. CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION (CLEAN) In utility, the screen can be set as not to be effected by touching the screen when clean with clothes. To clean the GOT, wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent. POINT POINT POINT...
  • Page 322 16 - 2 16. CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION (CLEAN)
  • Page 323 INSTALLATION OF COREOS, BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR For executing the GOT utility, install the BootOS and standard monitor OS on the C drive (built-in flash memory) of the GOT, or set the OS boot drive to [A: Standard SD card] and insert the SD card with OS files into the GOT. (BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment.
  • Page 324: Bootos And Standard Monitor Os Required For Installation

    17.1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation Under-mentioned BootOS and Standard monitor OS are necessary to execute utility. OS name Function overview Storage location Built-in flash memory Required for the control of GOT and the communication between PC and GOT. C: \G1BOOT\ Installed at factory shipment.
  • Page 325: Prior Preparations For Installing Bootos And Standard Monitor Os

    17.2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS For the installation using GOT, the SD card or USB memory storing BootOS or standard monitor OS is required. For the method of writing BootOS and standard monitor OS in the SD card or USB memory, the following three methods are available.
  • Page 326: Bootos And Standard Monitor Os Installation Using Sd Card Or Usb Memory

    17.3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using SD card or USB Memory There are the following two types for the BootOS, standard monitor OS installation using the SD card or USB memory. (1) Installing when starting the GOT 17.3.1 Installing when starting the GOT) All the OS and project data stored in the SD card or USB memory are transferred to the GOT when powering on the GOT.
  • Page 327: Installing When Starting The Got

    17.3.1 Installing when starting the GOT The displayed message is different depending on the installation condition of standard monitor OS. When the screen requesting operation is displayed, operate the GOT according to the instructions on the screen.  Operation procedure (1) When installing with SD card Power OFF the GOT, switch the SD card access switch to OFF, and install the SD card where the...
  • Page 328 (2) When installing with USB memory Power off the GOT, and install the USB memory where the BootOS, standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the USB interface of the GOT. The BootOS cannot be stored in the USB memory where the standard monitor OS or project data is stored.
  • Page 329: Installing Using The Program/Data Control Function (Utility)

    17.3.2 Installing using the program/data control function (Utility) For details on program/data control function, refer to the following. 14. FILE DISPLAY AND COPY (PROGRAM/DATA CONTROL) POINT POINT POINT Precaution on executing program/data control function When execute program/data control function, standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance. Thus, this function cannot be used for the initial installation of standard monitor OS after purchasing GOT.
  • Page 330 (2) When installing with USB memory Install the USB memory in which BootOS, standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the USB interface of GOT. Display the data control function screen (Utility) on the GOT, and install BootOS, standard monitor OS. Touch [Install] Do not pull out the USB memory or power off the GOT while install execution.
  • Page 331: When Installing The Different Version Of Bootos, Standard Monitor Os

    17.4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS, Standard Monitor OS  BootOS installation When installing BootOS, GOT compares the version of the BootOS to be installed with the version of BootOS which is already installed. If the major version of BootOS to be installed is old, execute the following operations to prevent it from being rewritten.
  • Page 332 Example H/W version: H Boot OS version: AD Rating plate: HD BootOS BootOS MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION version Version 17 - 10 17. INSTALLATION OF COREOS, BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 17.4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS, Standard Monitor OS...
  • Page 333: Coreos

    17.5 CoreOS Install CoreOS only when the GOT will not be the status of factory shipment even when BootOS is installed. Normally, the CoreOS has not to be installed. POINT POINT POINT Precautions for installing CoreOS When executing the CoreOS installation once, it cannot be canceled on the way. Do not attempt the following to cancel the installation on the way.
  • Page 334  Installing the CoreOS Write the CoreOS from GT Designer3 to the SD card. For details of GT Designer3 operation, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) After confirming that the GOT is powered off, install the SD card in the GOT.
  • Page 335: When The Coreos Cannot Be Installed

    17.5.2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed When the CoreOS cannot be installed, confirm the following item. If the CoreOS cannot be installed even after checking the following item, the error may be caused by a hardware failure. Please consult your local Mitsubishi (Electric System) Service center or representative. Error Action (1) Check whether the SD card access switch of the GOT is on.
  • Page 336 17 - 14 17. INSTALLATION OF COREOS, BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 17.5 CoreOS...
  • Page 337: Setting The Communication Interface

    18. DRAWING SOFTWARE SETTINGS (CONTROLLER SETTING AND COMMON SETTINGS) 18.1 Setting the Communication Interface Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment. When using the GOT at the first time, make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication driver before writing to GOT.
  • Page 338: Setting Connected Equipment (Channel Setting)

    18.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT.  Setting Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from the list menu. Refer to the following explanations for the setting.
  • Page 339  Setting item This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer, Controller Type, Driver and I/F. When using the channel No.2 put a check mark at [Use CH*]. Item Description Use CH* Select this item when setting the channel No.2. Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.
  • Page 340 (2) Setting [Controller Type] The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used. For the settings, refer to the following. Type Model name Type Model name Q26UDEHCPU R04CPU Q50UDEHCPU R08CPU Q100UDEHCPU R16CPU Q03UDVCPU R32CPU Q04UDVCPU R120CPU Q06UDVCPU R16MTCPU Q13UDVCPU...
  • Page 341 Type Model name Type Model name Q00JCPU A1NCPUR21 Q00CPU A2NCPU Q01CPU A2NCPUP21 Q02CPU A2NCPUR21 Q02HCPU A2NCPU-S1 Q06HCPU A2NCPUP21-S1 Q12HCPU A2NCPUR21-S1 Q25HCPU A3NCPU Q02PHCPU A3NCPUP21 Q06PHCPU A3NCPUR21 Q12PHCPU A2USCPU Q25PHCPU A2USCPU-S1 Q12PRHCPU A2USHCPU-S1 Q25PRHCPU A1SCPU MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6* QS001CPU A1SCPUC24-R2 Q2ACPU A1SHCPU Q2ACPU-S1 A2SCPU...
  • Page 342 Type Model name Type Model name WS0-CPU0 DMC10 MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 DMC50 WS0-CPU3 SDC15 MELSERVO-J2M-P8A MELSERVO-J2M-P8A SDC25 MELSERVO-J2M-*DU MELSERVO-J2M-*DU SDC26 MELSERVO-J2S-*A MELSERVO-J2S-*A SDC35 MELSERVO-J2S-*CP MELSERVO-J2S-*CP SDC36 MELSERVO-J2S-*CL MELSERVO-J2S-*CL SDC20 MELSERVO-J3-*A MELSERVO-J3-*A SDC21 MELSERVO-J3-*T MELSERVO-J3-*T SDC30 MELSERVO-J4-*A MELSERVO-J4-*A SDC31 FREQROL-S500 SDC40A FREQROL-S500E SDC40B FREQROL-E500 SDC40G...
  • Page 343 Type Model name Type Model name CS1H JW-21CU CS1G JW-31CUH CS1D JW-50CUH CJ1H JW-22CU OMRON SYSMAC CS/CJ CJ1G JW-32CUH SHARP JW CJ1M JW-33CUH CJ2H JW-70CUH CJ2M JW-100CUH E5AN JW-100CU E5EN Z-512J OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO E5CN ACS-13A□/□,□,C5 E5GN JCS-33A-□/□□,C5 E5ZN JCR-33A-□/□□,C5 KV-700 JCD-33A-□/□□,C5 KV-1000...
  • Page 344 Type Model name Type Model name FP0-C16CT PXR3 FP0-C32CT PXR4 FP0R PXR5 FP1-C24C PXR9 FUJI PXR/PXG/PXH FP1-C40C PXG4 PXG5 FP2SH PXG9 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PXH9 MEWNET-FP Series SPH200 FP10(S) SPH300 FUJI MICREX-SX SPH FP10SH SPH3000 FP-M(C20TC) SPH2000 FP-M(C32TC) PROGIC-8 FP-Σ...
  • Page 345 Type Model name Type Model name NFCP100 H-PCP-J NFJT100 H-PCP-A F3SP05 H-PCP-B F3SP08 Z-TIO F3SP10 Z-DIO F3SP20 Z-CT F3SP30 CB100 F3FP36 CB400 F3SP21 CB500 F3SP22-0S CB700 YOKOGAWA STARDOM/FA-M3 Series F3SP25 CB900 F3SP35 FB100 F3SP28 FB400 F3SP38 FB900 F3SP53 RB100 F3SP58 RKC SR Mini HG RB400 F3SP59...
  • Page 346 Type Model name Type Model name 1756-L IC693CPU311 1756-L1M1 IC693CPU313 1756-L1M2 IC693CPU323 1756-L1M3 IC693CPU350 1756-L61 IC693CPU360 1756-L62 IC693CPU363 1756-L63 IC693CPU366 1756-L55M12 IC693CPU367 1756-L55M13 IC693CPU374 1756-L55M14 IC697CPU731 1756-L55M16 IC697CPX772 AB Control/CompactLogix 1756-L55M22 IC697CPX782 1756-L55M23 IC697CPX928 1756-L55M24 IC697CPX935 1769-L31 IC697CPU780 1769-L32E IC697CGR772 1769-L32C IC697CGR935 1769-L35E...
  • Page 347 Type Model name (Manufacturer) NFCP100 YOKOGAWA NFJT100 TSX P57 203M TSX P57 253M TSX P57 303M TSX P57 353M TSX P57 453M 140 CPU 311 10 MODBUS 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 534 14U Schneider Electric 140 CPU 651 50 140 CPU 651 60 140 CPU 671 60 140 CPU 113 02...
  • Page 348: I/F Communication Setting

    18.1.2 I/F communication setting This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces. Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used.  Setting Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from the menu. The I/F Communication Setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation. POINT POINT POINT...
  • Page 349  Setting item The following describes the setting items of the standard I/F setting.(GT14 Handy does not use the extend I/F setting, RS232 setting.) Item Description Set channel No. and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces. Standard I/F Setting Standard I/F-1, Standard I/F-2, Standard I/F-3, Standard I/F-4 Set the CH No.
  • Page 350: Precautions

    POINT POINT POINT Channel No., drivers (1) Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. 30. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION (2) Drivers The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F]. When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct.
  • Page 351: Writing The Communication Settings And Common Settings Onto The Got

    18.3 Writing the Communication Settings and Common Settings onto the GOT Write the communication settings and common settings onto the GOT. For details on writing to GOT, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual 18.3.1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT Select [Communication] [Write to GOT…] from the menu.
  • Page 352: Checking The Project Data And Os Writing On Got

    18.3.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT Confirm if the standard monitor OS, communication driver, option OS, project data, communication settings and common settings are properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3. For reading from the GOT, refer to the following manual.
  • Page 353: Maintenance And Inspection

    19. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION [STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE WARNING PRECAUTIONS] • When power is on, do not touch the terminals. Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction. • Connect the battery correctly. Do not discharge, disassemble, heat, short, solder or throw the battery into the fire. Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat, burst or take fire, resulting in injuries or fires.
  • Page 354: Daily Inspection

    19.1 Daily Inspection  Daily inspection items Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action Check for loose mounting Retighten screws within the specified Installation status of GOT Securely mounted screws. torque range. Retighten screws with Loose terminal screws Not loose Retighten terminal screws. screwdriver.
  • Page 355: Cleaning Method

    19.3 Cleaning Method Use the GOT always in a clean condition. To clean the GOT, wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent. For the display operation of the [Clean] screen, refer to the following. 16. CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION (CLEAN) Clean POINT POINT...
  • Page 356: Battery Voltage Low Detection And Battery Replacement

    19.4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement  Low battery voltage detection and replacement Battery contains the data for notifying the maintenance timing and current time. It is recommended that you replace battery periodically. For the replacement procedure, refer to the following. 6.3.2 Battery replacement procedure The battery voltage low detection can be confirmed by the utility screen and system alarm.
  • Page 357 HINT HINT HINT Example of alarm output to external device (lamp, buzzer, etc.) The following describes an example of outputting the battery voltage low signal from a FX series PLC to an external device with system information. Condition: The Write Device is "D20" and all data is used (the button is clicked on the setting screen of drawing software) for the system information assignment.
  • Page 358  Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU member states. (1) Disposal precautions In EU member states, there is a separate collection system for waste batteries.
  • Page 359: Backlight Shutoff Detection

    The brightness of the backlight decreases with the lapse of usage period. When backlight shutoff is detected or the display becomes unclear, replace the backlight. (GT14 Handy requires LED replacement.) For replacement of the backlight, contact your nearest sales office or FA Center.
  • Page 360 19 - 8 19. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 19.5 Backlight Shutoff Detection...
  • Page 361: Got Restoration Sheet

    20. TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains the GOT restoration sheet and the error message/system alarm list. 20.1 GOT Restoration Sheet This section provides restoration methods for the case the GOT does not operate normally, which are listed in check sheets. The following explains how to use each sheet. (1) When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions (GOT status check sheet) When the GOT does not operate or malfunctions, identify the cause of the malfunction etc.
  • Page 362  GOT status check sheet Check the GOT starting from (1) GOT status. Proceed as instructed by "Action". (1) GOT status Phenomenon Cause/status Action (a) Frequency when the GOT does not operate, an error occurs on the screen, etc. Occurrence frequency: Occurs always.
  • Page 363 Phenomenon Cause/status Action (e) Buzzer sound Does not sound. Buzzer sound: Proceed to (2) Status of the GOT when it Continues to beep randomly. Example: The rhythm as three beeps, one beep, freezes. Continues to beep in a and then two beeps is repeated. particular pattern.
  • Page 364 (4) GOT restoration procedure Follow the procedures below starting from (a) and in order to check if the GOT is restored. If the GOT is not restored, proceed to the next item. Check item Cause Action (a) Power the GOT ON/OFF. Restored Not restored (Proceed to (b).) (b) Reset or power ON/OFF the PLC CPU.
  • Page 365  GOT installation status check sheet Check the current installation status of the GOT you are using against the GOT installation status described in the upper column of items (1) to (7). When the measure described in the lower column is needed, take the measure for the current status. When the measure is taken, check the result, "Effective"...
  • Page 366 (3) Wiring of GOT's FG cable and power line Installed together The FG cable and power line of the GOT Current status Not installed are installed together. together Power for the power equipment Measure for the Separating the FG cable and power line of Effective cables installed the GOT in wiring reduces the influence of...
  • Page 367 (5) Grounding status Servo Connection cable The FG cables of the control CN1A CN1B Connected equipment (such as PLC) and the Current status power equipment (such as servo amplifier) are connected as shown connected by "a". Panel grounding Panel grounding Servo Connection cable...
  • Page 368: Troubleshooting

    (6) Grounding status of the panel on which the GOT is installed Connection cable A single ground cable is led from the panel having the control equipment Current status Ground cable led from the such as PLC to the panel having the Not led panel having the control GOT.
  • Page 369 (7) Power supply system Main power PLC power AC200V The power from the same system is used for the GOT, I/O equipment (such as Used I/O power Current status relay), and power equipment (such as Not Not used servo amplifier). equipment Main circuit power Power...
  • Page 370  System configuration check sheet Fill in the brackets with the unit/module name. (1) System configuration of the GOT (a) GOT main unit (b) Communication interface (c) Cable between the PLC and GOT (d) Cable length (2) System configuration of the PLC (a) Power supply module (b) CPU module Used...
  • Page 371: Error Message And System Alarm

    20.2 Error Message and System Alarm This chapter describes the error message and system alarm displayed in the GOT. As the error code and error message displaying functions when an error occurs at the GOT, controller or network, there are two kinds: system alarm and advanced system alarm. For details of the system alarm and advanced system alarm, refer to the following.
  • Page 372  Checking error messages with the utility (Utility) The error code and error message can be checked with the system alarm display of the utility when the object is not set. 15.3 System Alarm Display Error code and reference manual Channel No.
  • Page 373: List Of Error Message/System Alarm

    20.2.2 List of error message/system alarm The system alarm detected with GOT is shown below. Error Channel No. Error message Action code storage Decrease the number of objects from the displayed screen. Set monitor points too large. For the number of maximum objects for 1 screen, refer to the following. Decrease setting points.
  • Page 374 Error Channel No. Error message Action code storage Available memory of the SD card is insufficient. Insufficient memory media Confirm the available memory of the SD card. capacity. The available memory can be confirmed by system information screen, Confirm M-card capacity. which is described in GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals).
  • Page 375 Error Channel No. Error message Action code storage Error occurred in the specified file register when executing the recipe function by specifying the file register name. File system error occurred in • Execute the recipe function again after confirming the file register PLC.
  • Page 376 Error Channel No. Error message Action code storage The time-out error occurred during communicating. • Confirm the cable omission and status of the PLC. Channel No. is not displayed in error code or error message in the case an error occurs when using the multi-channel function. Communication timeout.
  • Page 377 Error Channel No. Error message Action code storage The station number set in the project data and the station number set in the switching station No. device do not exist in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3. • Add the station number set in the project data to the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3.
  • Page 378 Error Channel No. Error message Action code storage Channel (CH.No.1 to 2) to communicate with a controller is not set. • After setting the Communication Settings on the GT Designer3, Communication channel not set. download it to the GOT. Set channel number on Utility. •...
  • Page 379 Error Channel No. Error message Action code storage Error occurred while executing the auto repeat function of the touch switch object. Confirm the following. Auto repeat error. Confirm • Confirm that the other system error has not occurred during auto system information.
  • Page 380 Error Channel No. Error message Action code storage The logging setting specified in the historical trend graph setting does not Logging setting does not exist or exist. setting value error. Review the historical trend graph setting and specify a logging setting that exists.
  • Page 381 MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS When connecting GT14 Handy and Mitsubishi PLCs, refer to the followings for the device range that can be set,the access range for monitoring and how to monitor redundant systems. • Device Range that Can Be Set GOT1000Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) (for GT Works3) 2.
  • Page 383: Connectable Model List

    21. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 21.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU RS-232 MELSEC iQ-R Series RS-422 R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU...
  • Page 384 Commu Commu Series Model Clock nication Refer to Series Model Clock nication Refer to type type Q12DCCPU-V Q00JCPU C Controller Q24DHCCPU-V/VG module RS-232 21.2.1 Q00CPU Q24DHCCPU-LS (Q Series) Q01CPU Q26DHCCPU-LS Q02CPU RS-232 MELSEC-QS QS001CPU RS-422 Q02HCPU L02CPU Q06HCPU L06CPU Q12HCPU L26CPU 21.2.1 Q25HCPU...
  • Page 385 Commu Commu Series Model Clock nication Refer to Series Model Clock nication Refer to type type A171SCPU-S3 A1NCPU A171SCPU-S3N A171SHCPU A1NCPUP21 Motion A171SHCPUN controller A1NCPUR21 RS-422 21.2.4 A172SHCPU A2NCPU (A Series) A172SHCPUN A2NCPUP21 A173UHCPU A2NCPUR21 MELSEC-A A173UHCPU-S1 RS-422 21.2.4 (AnCPU) A2NCPU-S1 WS0-CPU0 MELSEC-WS...
  • Page 386: System Configuration

    21.2 System Configuration 21.2.1 Connecting to QCPU Communication driver Serial (MELSEC) (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector RS-422 connector QCPU conversion box conversion cable Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable RS-422 connector Communicati conversion box model...
  • Page 387: Connecting To Lcpu

    21.2.2 Connecting to LCPU Communication driver Serial (MELSEC) (1) When using the connector conversion box RS-422 connector Connector LCPU Adapter conversion box conversion cable Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Commu External cable connectable RS-422 connector conversion box model distance...
  • Page 388 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Adapter Communication type L02CPU L06CPU GT11H-C30(3m) L26CPU GT11H-C60(6m) L26CPU-BT GT11H-C100(10m) L6ADP-R2 RS-422 13.5m 1 GOT for 1 PLC L02CPU-P RS422 connection L06CPU-P diagram 3) L26CPU-P L26CPU-PBT...
  • Page 389: Connecting To Qnacpu

    21.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU Communication driver Serial (MELSEC) (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector QnACPU conversion box Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Communication conversion box model distance Model Cable model equipment type GT11H-C30-37P (3m)
  • Page 390: Connecting To Acpu

    21.2.4 Connecting to ACPU Communication driver Serial (MELSEC) (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector ACPU conversion box Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Communication conversion box model distance Model Cable model equipment type GT11H-C30-37P (3m)
  • Page 391: Connecting To Melsec Iq-F Series

    21.2.5 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-F Series Communication driver Serial (MELSEC)  When using the connector conversion box Connector FX5UCPU Expansion Expansion FX5UCCPU board adapter conversion box Connection cable External cable (1) When connecting to FX5U (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Number of Connector Total Communi...
  • Page 392 (3) When connecting to FX5UC (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Number of Connector Total Communi Cable model connectable External cable Expansion Expansion conversion box model distance Model cation Connection diagram equipment board adapter type number 1 GOT for 1 RS422 connection RS-422 PLC built-in GT11H-C30-37P (3m)
  • Page 393  When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) FX5UCPU Expansion Expansion FX5UCCPU board adapter Connection cable External cable (1) When connecting to FX5U (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Number of Total connectable External cable Expansion Expansion Communication Cable model model distance Model equipment board adapter...
  • Page 394 (4) When connecting to FX5UC (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Number of Total connectable External cable Expansion Expansion Communication Cable model model distance Model equipment board adapter type Connection diagram number 1 GOT for 1 RS232 connection -232ADP RS-232 GT11H-C30-37P (3m) Expansion diagram 2) board...
  • Page 395  When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Expansion Expansion FX5UCPU board adapter External cable (1) When connecting to MELSEC iQ-F Series (RS-422 connection) Number of Total connectable External cable Expansion Expansion Communication model distance Model equipment board adapter type 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS-422 13.5m built-in port...
  • Page 396 (4) When connecting to FX5UC (RS-232 connection) Number of Total connectable External cable Expansion Expansion Communication model distance Model equipment board adapter type GT11H-C30 (3m) 1 GOT for 1 GT11H-C60 (6m) -232-ADP RS-232 Expansion RS232 connection adapter diagram 3) When the expansion board (communication board) and the expansion adapter are connected, a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Works3 installed can be connected to them individually.
  • Page 397: Connecting To Fxcpu

    21.2.6 Connecting to FXCPU Communication driver MELSEC-FX  When using the connector conversion box Function Connector Function FXCPU expansion adapter conversion box board Connection cable External cable (1) When connecting to FX , FX , FX , FX , FX or FX Connection cable Number of...
  • Page 398 (3) When connecting to FX , FX , FX , FX , FX (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Number of Connector Total Function Commu External cable connectable Function Cable model conversion box model distance expansion Model nication equipment Connection diagram number adapter *1*2 type...
  • Page 399 (6) When connecting to FX -/D, FX -/DSS) (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable conversion box model distance Model Communication type Cable model equipment GT01-C10R4-8P(1m) GT11H-C30-37P (3m) 1 GOT for 1 -/D RS-422 GT01-C30R4-8P(3m) GT11H-CNB-37S GT11H-C60-37P (6m) PLC built-in -/DSS...
  • Page 400 (11) When connecting to FX -/D, FX -/DS, FX -/DSS) (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Number of Connector Total Commu Cable model connectable External cable conversion box model distance Model Function adapter nication Connection diagram equipment type number GT01-C30R2-9S(3m) -/D 1 GOT for 1 -232ADP -/DS RS-232...
  • Page 401  When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Function Function FXCPU expansion adapter board Connection cable External cable (1) When connecting to FX , FX , FX , FX , FX or FX Connection cable Number of Total External cable connectable Function expansion Function Communication...
  • Page 402 (3) When connecting to FX , FX , FX , FX , FX (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Number of Function Total Commun Function External cable connectable Cable model model distance expansion Model ication equipment Connection diagram number adapter *1*2 Type board 1 GOT for 1 -232-BD...
  • Page 403 (6) When connecting to FX -/D, FX -/DSS) (RS-422 connection) Connection cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Cable model GT11H-C30-37P (3m) -/D RS-422 GT11H-C15R4-8P GT11H-C60-37P (6m) 1 GOT for 1 PLC built-in port -/DSS GT11H-C100-37P (10m) (7) When connecting to FX...
  • Page 404 (11) When connecting to FX -/D, FX -/DS, FX -/DSS) (RS-232 connection) Connection cable Number of Total connectable External cable Communication Cable model model distance Model Function adapter equipment type Connection diagram number -/D -232ADP 1 GOT for 1 function RS232 connection -/DS RS-232...
  • Page 405  When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Function Function FXCPU expansion adapter board Connection cable (1) When connecting to FX , FX , FX , FX , FX (RS-232 connection) Number of Total External cable connectable Function expansion Communication model distance Model Function adapter...
  • Page 406 (3) When connecting to FX -/D, FX -/DSS) (RS-232 connection) Number of connectable Total External cable model distance Model Function adapter Communication type equipment GT11H-C30 (3m) -/D -232ADP GT11H-C60 (6m) RS-232 1 GOT for 1 function adapter -/DSS -232ADP-MB RS232 connection diagram 3) A GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Developer installed can be connected to the function adapter and the FXCPU individually.
  • Page 407: Connecting To Wscpu

    21.2.7 Connecting to WSCPU Communication driver MELSEC-WS (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector WSCPU conversion box Connection cable External cable Connection cable Connector Total Number of connectable External cable conversion box model distance equipment Model Communication type Cable model MELSEC-WS RS-232 WS0-C20R2 (2m)
  • Page 408: Connecting To The Motion Controller Cpu (Q170Mcpu)

    21.2.8 Connecting to the motion controller CPU (Q170MCPU) Communication driver A/QnA/L/Q CPU,LJ71C24,QJ71C24 (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector Q170MCPU conversion box Connection cable External cable Connection cable Connector Total Number of connectable External cable conversion box model distance equipment Model Communication type...
  • Page 409: Connection Diagram

    21.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 4) GOT and the PLC. Connector FX PLC side conversion box side (D-Sub 25-pin) 21.3.1 RS-232 cable  Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1) Connector FX PLC side conversion box side (D-Sub 9-pin) RS232 connection diagram 5)
  • Page 410: Rs-422 Cable

    RS422 connection diagram 3)  Precautions when preparing a cable External cable PLC side GT11H-C□□□ side (terminal block) (1) Cable length The total distance (between the GOT and a controller) FG(Shield) Shield of RS-232 cable must be 6m or less. O/R(A) (2) Connector conversion box side connector O/BK(A)
  • Page 411 RS422 connection diagram 6) External cable PLC side GT11H-C□□□ side (terminal block) FG(Shield) Shield O/R(A) O/BK(A) W/R(A) W/BK(A) PK/R(A) GY/R(A) Y/R(A) GY/BK(A) Y/BK(A) Set the terminating resistor of the PLC side to "330Ω ".  Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length The total distance (between the GOT and a controller) of RS-232 cable must be total distance or less.
  • Page 412: Got Side Settings

    21.4 GOT Side Settings 21.4.1 Setting communication interface 21.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the connected equipment. (1) Serial (MELSEC) Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected 9600bps,...
  • Page 413 (3) MELSEC-WS Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected 9600bps, equipment. (Default: 115200bps) 19200bps, Transmission When the setting exceeds the limit of the 38400bps, Speed connected equipment, communication is 57600bps, performed at the fastest transmission 115200bps speed supported by the connected...
  • Page 414: Plc Side Setting

    21.5 PLC Side Setting When a GOT and an LCPU are connected via an L6ADP- 21.5.2 L6ADP-R4 adapter settings R4 adapter, set the following communication setting. 21.5.1 L6ADP-R4 adapter settings Set the communication speed in GX Works2. Set the communication settings by the DIP switches of the L6ADP-R4 adapter.
  • Page 415: Precautions

    21.6 Precautions  Connection to FXCPU  Connection in the multiple CPU system (1) When connecting to FX series When the keyword of FXCPU (FX series) has been When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the set, GOT may not be able to monitoring. Perform an I/O following time is taken until when the PLC runs.
  • Page 416  Connection to MELSEC iQ-F Series POINT POINT POINT MELSEC iQ-F Series communication settings For details of MELSEC iQ-F Series communication settings, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-F Series User's Manual Module parameter settings as a default value (MELSOFT Connection).
  • Page 417: Connectable Model List

    22. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 22.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. 22.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU RS-232 MELSEC iQ-R Series 22.2.1 R04ENCPU RS-422 R08ENCPU...
  • Page 418 Commu Series Model Clock Refer to Commu nication Series Model Clock Refer to nication Q2ACPU Q00JCPU Q2ACPU-S1 Q00CPU MELSEC-QnA RS-232 22.2.5 Q3ACPU (QnACPU) RS-422 Q01CPU Q4ACPU Q02CPU RS-232 22.2.2 Q4ARCPU RS-422 Q02HCPU Q2ASCPU Q06HCPU Q2ASCPU-S1 Q12HCPU Q2ASHCPU Q25HCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1 Q02PHCPU A2UCPU Q06PHCPU RS-232...
  • Page 419 Commu Series Model Clock Refer to Commu nication Series Model Clock Refer to nication A273UCPU Motion A2ACPUR21-S1 A273UHCPU controller RS-232 22.2.7 A3ACPU RS-422 A273UHCPU-S3 A3ACPUP21 (A Series) A373UCPU A3ACPUR21 A373UCPU-S3 A1NCPU A171SCPU A1NCPUP21 A171SCPU-S3 A1NCPUR21 A171SCPU-S3N Motion A2NCPU MELSEC-A RS-232 A171SHCPU 22.2.7 controller...
  • Page 420: Serial Communication Module/Computer Link Module

    22.1.2 Serial communication module/Computer link module CPU series Model name MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71C24, RJ71C24-R2, RJ71C24-R4 C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) MELSEC-Q(Q mode) QJ71C24 , QJ71C24-R2 Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4 MELSECNET/H remote I/O station CNC C70 QJ71CMO...
  • Page 421: System Configuration

    22.2 System Configuration 22.2.1 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-R series Communication driver Serial (MELSEC) (1) When using the connector conversion box Serial Connector RCPU communication conversion box module Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Serial External cable connectable Communic conversion box...
  • Page 422: Connecting To Qcpu (Q Mode)

    (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Serial communication RCPU module External cable Total Number of connectable External cable Serial communication model distance equipment Model Communication type module GT11H-C30 (3m) RJ71C24 GT11H-C60 (6m) RS-232 RJ71C24-R2 RS232 connection diagram 3) MELSEC 2 GOTs for 1 serial iQ-R GT11H-C30 (3m)
  • Page 423 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Serial QCPU communication (Q mode) module Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Total External cable connectable Serial communication Communication model distance Model Cable model equipment type module QJ71C24 QJ71C24N 2 GOTs for 1 serial QJ71C24-R2 RS232 connection RS-232...
  • Page 424: Connecting To Lcpu

    22.2.3 Connecting to LCPU Communication driver Serial (MELSEC) (1) When using the connector conversion box Serial Connector LCPU communication conversion box module Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Serial Communi External cable connectable conversion box model distance communication Model...
  • Page 425 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Serial LCPU communication module External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Serial communication module GT11H-C30(3m) LJ71C24 GT11H-C60(6m) RS-232 LJ71C24-R2 RS232 connection diagram 3) 2 GOTs for 1 serial MELSEC-L GT11H-C30(3m) communication module...
  • Page 426: Connecting To Qcpu (A Mode)

    22.2.4 Connecting to QCPU (A mode) Communication driver Serial (MELSEC) (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector QCPU Computer conversion box (A mode) link module External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Commun External cable connectable Computer link conversion box model...
  • Page 427 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) QCPU Computer (A mode) link module Connection cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Computer link module A1SJ71UC24-R2 GT11H-C30(3m) A1SJ71C24-R2 GT11H-C60(6m) RS-232 A1SJ71UC24-PRF RS232 connection diagram 3) A1SJ71C24-PRF MELSEC-Q 1 GOT for 1 computer link...
  • Page 428: Connecting To Qnacpu (Qnacpu Type)

    22.2.5 Connecting to QnACPU (QnACPU type) Communication driver Communication driver AJ71C24/UC24 AJ71QC24,MELDAS C6* (When connecting to a computer link module) (1) When using the connector conversion box Serial communication Connector QnACPU module conversion box (QnACPU type) /Computer link module External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of...
  • Page 429 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Serial communication QnACPU module (QnACPU type) /Computer link module Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Total Serial communication External cable connectable Communication model distance Model module or Computer link Cable model equipment Type module...
  • Page 430 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Serial communication QnACPU module (QnACPU type) /Computer link module External cable Total Number of connectable External cable Serial communication module Communication model distance equipment Model type Computer link module AJ71QC24 GT11H-C30 (3m) AJ71QC24N GT11H-C60 (6m) RS-232 AJ71QC24-R2...
  • Page 431: Connecting To Qnacpu (Qnascpu Type)

    22.2.6 Connecting to QnACPU (QnASCPU type) Communication driver Communication driver AJ71C24/UC24 AJ71QC24,MELDAS C6* (When connecting to a computer link module) (1) When using the connector conversion box Serial communication QnACPU Connector module conversion box (QnACPU type) /Computer link module Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of...
  • Page 432 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Serial communication QnACPU module (QnACPU type) /Computer link module Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Total External cable connectable Serial communication unit Communication model distance Model Cable model equipment type or computer link module A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N MELSEC-QnA...
  • Page 433 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Serial communication QnACPU module (QnACPU type) /Computer link module External cable Number of Total External cable connectable Serial communication unit Communication model distance Model equipment type or computer link module A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N GT11H-C30(3m) MELSEC-QnA A1SJ71QC24N1 GT11H-C60(6m)
  • Page 434: Connecting To Acpu (Ancpu Type)

    22.2.7 Connecting to ACPU (AnCPU type) Communication driver AJ71C24/UC24 (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector ACPU Computer link module conversion box (AnCPU type) External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Computer link Communica conversion box model...
  • Page 435: Connecting To Acpu (Anscpu Type, A0J2Hcpu, A2Ccpuc)

    (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) ACPU Computer link module (AnCPU type) External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Computer link module GT11H-C30 (3m) GT11H-C60 (6m) AJ71UC24 RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 6) MELSEC-A 1 GOT for 1 computer link GT11H-C30 (3m)
  • Page 436 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) ACPU Computer link (AnSPU type) module (A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC) Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Total External cable connectable model distance Model Communication type Cable model Computer link module equipment A1SJ71UC24-R2 A1SJ71C24-R2 A1SJ71UC24-PRF RS232 connection A1SJ71C24-PRF...
  • Page 437: Connection Diagram

    22.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 4) GOT and the PLC. PLC side connector D-sub 25-pin Connector conversion 22.3.1 RS-232 cable PLC side box side (D-Sub 9-pin)  Connection Diagram RS(RTS) RS232 connection diagram 1) SD(TXD) RD(RXD) PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin...
  • Page 438: Rs-422 Cable

    22.3.2 RS-422 cable  Precautions when preparing a cable  (1) Cable length Connection Diagram The total distance (between GOT and controllers) of RS422 connection diagram 1) RS-232 cable must be 6m or less. Connector conversion (2) Connector conversion box side connector box side PLC side For the connector conversion box side connector, refer...
  • Page 439  Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length The total distance (between GOT and controllers) of RS-422 cable must be 13m or less. (2) Connector conversion box side connector For the Connector conversion box side connector, refer to the following. 6.6 Connector Conversion Box (3) External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable...
  • Page 440: Got Side Settings

    22.4 GOT Side Settings 22.4.1 Setting communication interface 22.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the connected equipment. (1) Serial (MELSEC) Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected 9600bps,...
  • Page 441 (3) AJ71C24/UC24 POINT POINT POINT Item Description Range Set this item when change the Setting [Format] 4800bps, Transmission transmission speed used for This setting is required for replacement of F900 series 9600bps, Speed communication with the connected 19200bps with GOT1000 series. equipment.
  • Page 442: Plc Side Setting

    22.5 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates under the following transmission 22.5.1 Connecting serial specifications when it is connected to a Mitsubishi PLC in the computer link connection. communication module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) Transmission specifications Settings Data bit 8bits Parity bit Yes (Odd) POINT POINT...
  • Page 443: Connecting Serial Communication Module (Q, L Series)

    22.5.2 Connecting serial communication (2) When connecting to the CH2 side module (Q, L Series) POINT POINT POINT (1) Serial communication module (Q, L Series) For details of the serial communication module (Q, Switch Description value L Series), refer to the following manual. Specified Position value...
  • Page 444: Connecting Serial Communication Module (Qna Series)

    22.5.3 Connecting serial POINT POINT POINT communication module (QnA Series) (1) When the [Intelligent function module switch setting] has been set After writing PLC parameters to the PLC CPU, turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again, or POINT POINT POINT reset the PLC CPU.
  • Page 445 (a) Transmission speed setting (SW09 to SW12) Set the transmission speed (SW09 to SW12) as POINT POINT POINT follows. The transmission speed setting must be consistent When connecting a GOT to CH2 with that of the GOT side. Set the CH1 side mode switch to any other than "0" (interlocked operation).
  • Page 446: Connecting Computer Link Module

    22.5.4 Connecting computer link module (1) Mode setting switch Mode setting switch Description Set value RS-232 POINT POINT POINT Dedicated connection protocol RS-422 Format 1 Computer link module connection For details of the computer link module, refer to the following manual. (2) Transmission specifications setting switch Computer Link Module (Com.
  • Page 447 Transmission speed (b) A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-PRF, Setting switch A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-PRF 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps SW07 Transmission Setting specifications Description Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are switch value setting switch shown. SW03 Unused (c) A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71C24-R4 Write during RUN SW04 Enabled Transmission enabled/disabled setting...
  • Page 448 • Transmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07) (e) A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF Set the transmission speed (SW05 to SW07) as Transmission follows. Setting specifications Description The transmission speed setting must be consistent switch value setting switch with that of the GOT side. SW11 (Consistent Transmission speed...
  • Page 449: Precautions

    22.6 Precautions  Time taken until the PLC runs when connected in the multiple CPU system The following time is taken until the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.
  • Page 450 22 - 34 22. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 22.6 Precautions...
  • Page 451: Connectable Model List

    23. ETHERNET CONNECTION 23.1 Connectable Model List 23.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU MELSEC iQ-R Series Ethernet 23.2.1 R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU...
  • Page 452 Commu Commu Series Model Clock nication Refer to Series Model Clock nication Refer to type type Q2ASCPU Q00JCPU MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 Ethernet 23.2.1 (QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU Q00CPU Q2ASHCPU-S1 Q01CPU A2UCPU A2UCPU-S1 Q02CPU A3UCPU Q02HCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU Q06HCPU A2ACPUP21 Q12HCPU A2ACPUR21 Q25HCPU MELSEC-A A2ACPU-S1 Ethernet 23.2.1...
  • Page 453 Commu Commu Series Model Clock nication Refer to Series Model Clock nication Refer to type type A171SHCPU A2NCPU A171SHCPUN Motion A2NCPUP21 A172SHCPU controller Ethernet 23.2.1 A2NCPUR21 A172SHCPUN A2NCPU-S1 (A Series) A173UHCPU MELSEC-A A2NCPUP21-S1 Ethernet 23.2.1 A173UHCPU-S1 (AnCPU) A2NCPUR21-S1 WS0-CPU0 A3NCPU MELSEC-WS WS0-CPU1 A3NCPUP21...
  • Page 454: Ethernet Module

    23.1.2 Ethernet module CPU series Ethernet module MELSEC iQ-R Series Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) RJ71EN71 C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) MELSEC-Q (Q mode), MELSEC-QS Motion controller CPU (Q Series) QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71-B5 QJ71E71-B2 QJ71E71 CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) AJ71QE71N3-T AJ71QE71N-B5 AJ71QE71N-B2...
  • Page 455: System Configuration

    23.2 System Configuration 23.2.1 Connecting to Ethernet module  When connecting to MELSEC iQ-R Series, Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series), C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series), MELSEC-Q, QS, QnA, A or motion controller Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 (1) When using the connector conversion box Ethernet Connector PLC CPU...
  • Page 456 Connection cable Maximum Number of Connector segment connectable External cable Communication Ethernet module conversion box model Model Cable model length equipment type *3*4 AJ71E71N3-T GT14H-C30-42P(3m) AJ71E71N-B5 GT16H-CNB-42S GT14H-C60-42P(6m) AJ71E71N-B2 GT14H-C100-42P(10m) MELSEC-A AJ71E71N-T • 10BASE-T AJ71E71N-B5T Shielded twisted pair MELSEC-Q AJ71E71-S3 cable (STP) (A mode) A1SJ71E71N3-T...
  • Page 457  When connecting to MELSEC-FX Communication driver Ethernet( ), Gateway (2) When using the connector conversion box Ethernet Connector PLC CPU conversion box module Connection cable External cable Connection cable Maximum Number of Connector segment connectable External cable Communication Ethernet module conversion box model Model...
  • Page 458 The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades.
  • Page 459: Connection To Built-In Ethernet Port Cpu Or C Controller Module

    23.2.2 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C controller module Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 (1) When using the connector conversion box Connecting to Connector Built-in conversion box Ethernet port Connection cable External cable Maximum Number of Connector *1*2 segment connectable Connection cable External cable Communication...
  • Page 460 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, wireless LAN adapter (such as NZ2WL-JPA and NZ2WL-JPS), or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
  • Page 461: Connecting To Display I/F

    23.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector PLC CPU conversion box External cable Connection cable Maximum Number of Connector segment connectable Connection cable External cable Communication conversion box model Model length equipment type •...
  • Page 462: Connecting To Cc-Link Ie Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module

    23.2.4 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 (1) When using the connector conversion box CC-Link IE Connector Field Network conversion Ethernet adapter module Connection cable External cable CC-Link IE field network Ethernet Maximum Number of adapter module Connector segment...
  • Page 463: Connecting To Peripheral I/F

    23.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 (1) When using the connector conversion box Q172DCPU-S1 Connector Q173DCPU-S1 conversion PLC CPU Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU External cable Connection cable Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU-S1 MR-MQ100 Number of Connector Total connectable Connection cable External cable Communication conversion box model...
  • Page 464: Got Side Settings

    23.3 GOT Side Settings 23.3.1 Setting communication interface 23.3.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the connected equipment. Item Description Range Set the network No. of the GOT. GOT NET No. 1 to 239 (Default: 1) Set the station No.
  • Page 465: Ethernet Setting

    Item Description Range POINT POINT POINT Set the port No. of the connected Ethernet module. 1024 to 65534 Port No. (1) Example of [Detail setting]. (Default: 5001) For examples of [Detail Setting], refer to the Communic UDP, following. ation 23.4 PLC Side Setting Select one of the following [Controller Type].
  • Page 466: Routing Parameter Setting

    23.3.4 Routing parameter setting POINT POINT POINT Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. (1) Routing parameter setting of relay station However, the same transfer network number cannot be set Routing parameter setting is also necessary for twice or more (multiple times). the relay station.
  • Page 467: Plc Side Setting

    23.4 PLC Side Setting Model Refer to Model Refer to AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, R04CPU, R08CPU AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, R16CPU, R32CPU AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3, R120CPU, A1SJ71E71N3-T, R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU Ethernet module A1SJ71E71N-B5, 23.4.10 R08PCPU, R16PCPU (A Series) A1SJ71E71N-B2, R32PCPU, R120PCPU A1SJ71E71N-T, R04ENCPU, A1SJ71E71N-B5T, Built-in Ethernet 23.4.1 R08ENCPU, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,...
  • Page 468: Connecting To Built-In Ethernet Port Cpu (One-To One Connection)

    23.4.1 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT port CPU (one-to one Designer3 connection) POINT POINT POINT This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT configuration.
  • Page 469: Connecting To Built-In Ethernet Port Cpu (Multiple Connection)

    23.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet  Checking communication state of Built-in port CPU (multiple connection) Ethernet port CPU  (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system ...
  • Page 470   [Module parameter] of GX Works3 [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Built-in Ethernet port (For MELSEC iQ-R Series) POINT POINT POINT (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following.
  • Page 471: Connecting To Ethernet Module (Melsec Iq-R Series)

    23.4.3 Connecting to Ethernet  Checking communication state of Built-in module (MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet port CPU Series)  (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of This section describes the settings of the GOT and ...
  • Page 472  (2) Target Device Connection Configuration Setting [Module parameter] of GX Works3 (1) Module parameter of Ethernet module (MELSEC iQ- R Series) Item Set value Protocol (Use default value) Open system MELSOFT connection (fixed) Host station port No. (Use default value) POINT POINT POINT...
  • Page 473 (3) Routing setting  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Up to 238 [Target Station Network No.] scan be set. Designer3 However, the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). (1) Controller setting Therefore, the one that can access to other station from Item Set value (Use default value) the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of [Target...
  • Page 474 23.4.4 Connection to C Controller  Confirming the communication state of module (MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet module Series)  (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of This section describes the settings of the GOT and C ...
  • Page 475   [Module parameter] of CW Configurator [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Module parameter POINT POINT POINT (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 23.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) (2) Ethernet setting...
  • Page 476 23.4.5 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet  Checking communication state of C port CPU (one-to-one Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) connection)  (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in ...
  • Page 477   [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Checking communication state of Built-in Designer3 Ethernet port CPU  (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows POINT POINT POINT Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of  Windows (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT (a) When normal communication Designer3...
  • Page 478: Connecting To Built-In Ethernet Port Cpu (Multiple Connection)

    23.4.6 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet  [Q parameter setting] or [L parameter setting] port CPU (multiple connection) for GX Developer (1) Built-in Ethernet port This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Example: [Q parameter setting] screen Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration.
  • Page 479   [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Checking communication state of Built-in Designer3 Ethernet port CPU (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows POINT POINT POINT Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of  Windows (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT (a) When normal communication Designer3 C:\>Ping 192.168.0.1...
  • Page 480: Connecting To Ethernet Module (Q/L Series)

    23.4.7 Connecting to Ethernet module  [Network parameter] of GX Developer (Q/L Series) (1) Network parameter This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (Q Series) in the following case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Ethernet module (Q/L Series) For details of the Ethernet module (Q/L Series), refer to the following manual.
  • Page 481 (2) Operation setting (3) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer Network No.]s.
  • Page 482   [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Confirming the communication state of Designer3 Ethernet module (1) Controller setting (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Item Setting (Use default value.) ...
  • Page 483: Connecting To C Controller Module (Q Series)

    23.4.8 Connecting to C controller  Utility setting for C controller module (Q module (Q Series) Series) (1) Q12DCCPU-V This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Use SW3PVC-CCPU-J Ver.3.04E or later for the C controller module (Q Series) in the following case of the Controller module (Q Series) setting utility.
  • Page 484 (c) Detailed settings (2) Q24DHCCPU-V/VG Use SW4PVC-CCPU-J for the C Controller (Q Series) setting utility. (a) Connection settings Setting necessity at Item Set value GOT connection IP Address 192.168.3.1 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway IP address setting CH2 Setting necessity Item Set value at GOT connection...
  • Page 485   [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Checking communication state of C controller Designer3 module (Q Series)  (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows POINT POINT POINT Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of  Windows (1) [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT (a) When normal communication...
  • Page 486: Connecting To Ethernet Module (Qna Series)

    23.4.9 Connecting to Ethernet  Switch settings of Ethernet module module (QnA Series) Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange condition setting switch. This section describes the settings of the GOT and AJ71QE71N3-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N3-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-T, Ethernet module (QnA Series) in the following case of the AJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71-B5,...
  • Page 487 (2) Exchange condition setting switch  [Network parameter] of GX Developer Exchange (1) Network parameter Setting Setting necessity at condition Description switch value GOT connection setting switch Selection of line processing at TCP timeout error Data code (fixed) setting Self start mode setting (Must not to be used)
  • Page 488 (2) Routing parameter setting  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Up to 64 [Transfer Network No.]s can be set. Designer3 However, the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). (1) Controller setting Therefore, the one that can access to other station from Item Setting (Use default value.) the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [Transfer...
  • Page 489: Connecting To Ethernet Module (A Series)

    23.4.10 Connecting to Ethernet module  Switch settings of Ethernet module (A Series) Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange condition setting switch. This section describes the settings of the GOT and AJ71E71N3-T, AJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N3-T, A1SJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-T, Ethernet module (A Series) in the following case of the AJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71-S3 A1SJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3,...
  • Page 490 (c) Buffer memory settings used in the present Exchange Setting Setting necessity at condition Description example switch value GOT connection setting switch Buffer memory Selection of line address Item Set value processing at Dec (Hex) TCP timeout C0A80013 error 0 to 1 (0 to 1 IP address of Ethernet module (192.168.0.19) Data code...
  • Page 491 (2) Example of sequence program * Initial processing IP address of Ethernet module(192.168.0.19) Turned on at first scan only while detection running Initial request Read the initial fault code. Initial WDT ERR fault detection detection COM. ERR turned off request COM.
  • Page 492 (3) Communication confirmation  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT The RDY LED on the Ethernet module turns on when Designer3 the module is ready to communicate. For confirming the communication state, refer to the (1) Controller setting following. Item Setting (Use default value.) 23.4.7 ...
  • Page 493: Connecting To Ethernet Module (Fx Series)

    23.4.11 Connecting to Ethernet module  Ethernet parameter settings of FX -ENET-L (FX Series) Configuration tool (1) Ethernet setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and Set the Ethernet parameter with FX -ENET-L Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following case of the Configuration tool.
  • Page 494 (2) Operational settings (3) Open settings Setting necessity at Item Set value GOT connection Protocol Setting necessity at Item Set value Open system MELSOFT connection GOT connection Fixed buffer Communication data (Use default value) Fixed buffer code communication procedure IP address 192.168.0.19 Pairing open Initial timing...
  • Page 495  (2) Open Setting Ethernet parameter settings of FX -ENET- (1) Ethernet setting Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX Works2. To set FX -ENET-ADP, GX Works2 Ver.1.90U or later is required. For details on the setting of FX -ENET-ADP, refer to the following manual.
  • Page 496   [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Confirming the communication state of Designer3 Ethernet module (1) Controller setting  (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Item Setting (Use default value.) ...
  • Page 497 23.4.12 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet  Ethernet parameter setting of FX port FXCPU (FX (1) Ethernet setting Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX This section describes the settings of the GOT and Works2. Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following case of the To set FX , GX Works2 Ver.1.91V or later is required.
  • Page 498 (2) Open Setting  [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Controller setting Item Setting (Use default value.) GOT NET No. GOT PLC No. GOT IP Address 192.168.0.18 GOT Port No. 5019 (Communication) GOT Port No. 5014 (Ethernet Download) Setting necessity Default Gateway 0.0.0.0...
  • Page 499: Connecting To Display I/F (Cnc C70)

    23.4.13 Connecting to Display I/F (CNC  Confirming the communication state of C70) Ethernet module  (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows This section describes the settings of the GOT and Display Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of I/F (CNC C70) in the following case of the system ...
  • Page 500 (2) Communication confirmation  Checking communication state of CNC C70 The CNC C70 can communicate with the GOT when INIT.LED of the CNC C70 is lit.  (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows For confirming the communication state, refer to the Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of following.
  • Page 501: Connecting To Cc-Link Ie Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module

    23.4.14 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field  GX Works2 network parameter Ethernet/CC Network Ethernet adapter IE/MELSECNET module For detailed settings on the PLC side, refer to the following manual. This section describes the settings of the GOT, the MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/ Ethernet adapter module, and PLC side in the following Local Module User’s Manual system configuration.
  • Page 502   Ethernet adapter module setting [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 Set the parameter with the Ethernet adapter module setting tool. POINT POINT POINT (1) CC-Link IE field Network settings [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3, refer to the following.
  • Page 503: Connecting To Peripheral I/F (Built-In Ethernet Port Motion Controller Cpu)

    23.4.15 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/  System configuration F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Leave the Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU Controller CPU) settings as default in the following system configuration. Set [Ethernet] for [Controller Setting] on GT Designer3, and then connect Built-in Ethernet port This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built-in QCPU to the GOT.
  • Page 504 Setting necessity Item Set value (3) Controller setting at GOT connection Communication Data Item Setting (Use default value.) Code GOT NET No. (Use default value) Enable online change (MC GOT PLC No. protocol) GOT IP Address 192.168.3.1 Open settings Refer to (2). GOT Port No.
  • Page 505 POINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual 23 - 55...
  • Page 506: Precautions

    23.5 Precautions   Connection to QnA (S) CPU type Connection to LCPU Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module LCPU may diagnose (check file system, recovering (QnA Series) and PLC CPU (QnA/QnASCPU type). process, etc.) the SD memory card when turning on the power or when resetting.
  • Page 507  When setting IP address Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address. (Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the system) The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers. Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.
  • Page 508 23 - 58 23. ETHERNET CONNECTION 23.5 Precautions...
  • Page 509: Connectable Model List

    24. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 24.1 Connectable Model List 24.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU MELSEC iQ-R Series CC-Link(G4) R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU...
  • Page 510 Commu Commu Series Model Clock nication Refer to Series Model Clock nication Refer to type type Q2ACPU Q00JCPU Q2ACPU-S1 MELSEC-QnA Q3ACPU Q00CPU (QnACPU) Q4ACPU Q01CPU Q4ARCPU CC-Link Q02CPU Q2ASCPU (G4) Q02HCPU MELSEC-QnA Q2ASCPU-S1 (QnASCPU) Q2ASHCPU Q06HCPU Q2ASHCPU-S1 Q12HCPU A2UCPU Q25HCPU A2UCPU-S1 Q02PHCPU A3UCPU...
  • Page 511: Cc-Link Module/Peripheral Module

    Commu Commu Series Model Clock nication Refer to Series Model Clock nication Refer to type type QJ72LP25-25 MELSECNET/H A2USCPU Remote I/O QJ72LP25G A2USCPU-S1 station QJ72BR15 A2USHCPU-S1 CC-Link IE A1SCPU Field Network LJ72GF15-T2 head module A1SCPUC24-R2 MELSEC-A CC-Link IE field A1SHCPU (AnSCPU) Network Ethernet NZ2GF-ETB...
  • Page 512: System Configuration

    24.2 System Configuration 24.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) Communication driver CC-Link (G4) (1) When using the connector conversion box Peripheral Connector CC-Link connection conversion QCPU module module Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) External cable Connection cable Peripheral Connection cable 2) connection module Number of Total...
  • Page 513 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Peripheral CC-Link connection QCPU module module Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) External cable Peripheral connection Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) module Number of Total External cable connectable distance Communi Cable model Model CC-Link Cable...
  • Page 514: Connecting To Lcpu

    24.2.2 Connecting to LCPU Communication driver CC-Link (G4) (1) When using the connector conversion box Peripheral Connector CC-Link connection LCPU conversion module module Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) External cable Peripheral Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) connection module Connector Number of Total...
  • Page 515: Connection Diagram

    (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Peripheral CC-Link connection LCPU module module Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) External cable Peripheral connection Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) module Number of Total External cable connectable distance Cable model Model CC-Link Cable Max.
  • Page 516: Connection Diagram

    24.3 Connection Diagram  Precautions when preparing a cable The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. (1) Cable length The total distance (between GOT and peripheral 24.3.1 RS-232 cable connection module) of the RS-232 cable must be 6m or less.
  • Page 517: Got Side Settings

    24.4 GOT Side Settings 24.4.1 Setting communication interface 24.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the connected equipment. Item Description Range 9600bps, Set this item when change the 19200bps, Transmission transmission speed used for 38400bps...
  • Page 518: Plc Side Setting

    24.5 PLC Side Setting Model Reference  Switch setting of peripheral connection AJ65BT-G4-S3 24.5.1 module Peripheral connection module AJ65BT-R2N 24.5.2 Set the station number setting switch, data link transmission speed setting switch, and operation setting QJ61BT11 CC-Link module 24.5.3 QJ61BT11N DIP switch.
  • Page 519: Connecting Aj65Bt-R2N

    24.5.2 Connecting AJ65BT-R2N (3) Operation setting DIP switch Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and Operation setting DIP Setting necessity at Description Set value peripheral connection module in the following case of the switch switch system configuration. connection SW1 = OFF POINT...
  • Page 520  (4) RS-232 transmission setting switch Switch setting of peripheral connection module Setting RS-232 transmission Setting necessity at Set the station number setting switch, data link Description setting switch switch value transmission speed setting switch, and operation setting connection DIP switch. Peripheral transmission (fixed)
  • Page 521: Switch Setting Of Cc-Link Module (Q Series)

    24.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link 24.5.4 [Network parameter] of GX module (Q Series) Developer Set the station number setting switch, transmission speed / (1) Network parameter mode setting switch. QJ61BT11,QJ61BT11N Setting necessity Item Set value at GOT connection (1) Station number setting switch No.
  • Page 522: Parameter Setting (When Connecting To C Controller Module (Q Series))

    24.5.5 Parameter setting (2) Station information setting (when connecting to C controller module (Q Series)) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-J Ver.3.04E or later for the C Controller module setting utility. (1) Target module Setting necessity Item Set value at GOT connection Setting necessity at 192.168.3.3 Target module Set value...
  • Page 523: Controller Setting] Of Gt Designer3

    24.5.6 [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (2) CC-Link Utility’s [Parameter Setting] (a) Network parameter Item Set value Setting Item Set value necessity at 9600bps GOT connection 19200bps No. of boards in module Transmission Speed 38400bps 57600bps Target unit 115200bps Start I/O No. 0000 Retry 0 to 5times...
  • Page 524: Precautions

    24.6 Precautions  Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system, the following time is taken until when the PLC runs. QCPU (Q mode), motion controller CPU (Q series): 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70: 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs, a system alarm occurs.
  • Page 525 MITSUBISHI FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS 25. INVERTER CONNECTION ......25 - 1 26. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION ....26 - 1 27.
  • Page 527: Inverter Connection

    25. INVERTER CONNECTION 25.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series name Model Clock Refer to type FREQROL-A500/A500L FREQROL-F500/F500L RS-422 25.2.1 FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-F500J RS-422 25.2.2 FREQROL FREQROL-D700 FREQROL-F700PJ FREQROL-E700 RS-422 25.2.3 FREQROL-A700 FREQROL-F700 RS-422 25.2.4 FREQROL-F700P...
  • Page 528: System Configuration

    25.2 System Configuration 25.2.1 Connecting to FREQROL-A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L  When connecting to one inverter Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector Computer conversion Inverter link option Connection cable External cable Inverter Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable...
  • Page 529 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Computer Inverter link option External cable Inverter Number of Total External cable connectable model distance Model Computer link option Communication type equipment GT11H-C30 (3m) FREQROL- GT11H-C60 (6m) A500/A500L 1 GOT for 1 FR-A5NR RS-422 GT11H-C100 (10m) F500/F500L...
  • Page 530 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Inverter Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) External cable Connection Connection Inverter Distributor cable 1) cable 2) Number of Total Terminal cable External cable connectable distance...
  • Page 531  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 10) (Using the computer link option) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO (1) When using the connector conversion box Computer Computer Inverter link Inverter link option option Connector conversion External cable Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of...
  • Page 532 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Computer Computer Inverter link Inverter link option option External cable Inverter Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Computer link option Communication type GT11H-C30 (3m) FREQROL- GT11H-C60 (6m) A500/A500L FR-A5NR RS-422 10 inverters for 1 GOT GT11H-C100 (10m)
  • Page 533: Connecting To Freqrol-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700Pj

    25.2.2 Connecting to FREQROL-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700PJ  When connecting to one inverter Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector Inverter conversion External cable Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Connection diagram conversion box model...
  • Page 534  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 10) (Using the distributor) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO (1) When using the connector conversion box Inverter Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connector Distributor Distributor conversion Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) External cable Connection...
  • Page 535 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Inverter Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) External cable Connection Connection Inverter Distributor cable 1) cable 2) Number of Total Terminal cable External cable connectable distance...
  • Page 536: Connecting To Freqrol E700/Sensorless Servo (Freqrol-E700Ex)

    25.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700/sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX)  When connecting to one inverter Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO (1) When using the connector conversion box Control Connector terminal conversion Inverter option External cable Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable...
  • Page 537 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Control Inverter terminal option External cable Inverter Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Control terminal option Communication type GT11H-C30 (3m) FREQROLE700/ GT11H-C60 (6m) sensorless servo RS-422 1 GOT for 1 inverter FR-E7TR GT11H-C100 (10m) (FREQROL-...
  • Page 538 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Inverter Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) External cable Connection Connection Inverter Distributor cable 1) cable 2) Number of Total Terminal External cable connectable distance Connection...
  • Page 539  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 10) (Using the control terminal option) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO (1) When using the connector conversion box Control Control Inverter Inverter terminal terminal option option Connector conversion External cable Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of...
  • Page 540: Connecting To Freqrol-A700/F700/F700P

    (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Control Control Inverter Inverter terminal terminal option option External cable Inverter Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Control terminal option Communication type FREQROL- GT11H-C30 (3m) E700/sensorless GT11H-C60 (6m) servo RS-422 10 inverters for 1 GOT FR-E7TR...
  • Page 541 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Inverter External cable Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Total Number of connectable External cable Communication model distance equipment Model Connection diagram number type FREQROL- A700/F700/F700P RS-422 RS422 connection diagram 2) (PU port) GT11H-C30-37P (3m) GT11H-C60-37P (6m) 1 GOT for 1 inverter FREQROL-...
  • Page 542  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 10) (Using the distributor) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO (1) When using the connector conversion box Inverter Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connector Distributor Distributor conversion Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) External cable Connection...
  • Page 543 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Inverter Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) External cable Connection Connection Inverter Distributor cable 1) cable 2) Number of Total Terminal cable External cable connectable distance...
  • Page 544  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 10) (Using the built-in RS485 terminal block) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO (1) When using the connector conversion box Inverter Inverter Connector conversion External cable Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable...
  • Page 545 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Inverter Inverter External cable Inverter Number of connectable External cable Total distance model equipment Model Communication type GT11H-C30 (3m) GT11H-C60 (6m) FREQROL-A700/F700/F700P RS-422 10 inverters for 1 GOT GT11H-C100 (10m) (Built-in RS485 terminal block) RS422 connection diagram 19) 25 - 19 25.
  • Page 546: Connecting To Freqrol-A800/F800

    25.2.5 Connecting to FREQROL-A800/F800 Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO  When connecting to one inverter (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector conversion Inverter Connection cable External cable Inverter Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Communication Connection diagram conversion box...
  • Page 547 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Communication driver Inverter FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO External cable Inverter Total External cable Number of connectable equipment model distance Model Communication type GT11H-C30 (3m) GT11H-C60 (6m) FREQROL-A800/F800 RS-422 1 GOT for 1 inverter GT11H-C100 (10m) (Built-in RS485 terminal block) RS422 connection diagram 9)
  • Page 548 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Communication driver Inverter Inverter FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) External cable Connection Connection Inverter Distributor cable 1) cable 2) Number of Total Terminal cable...
  • Page 549 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO Inverter Inverter External cable Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of Total External cable connectable Communication model distance Model Connection diagram number equipment type GT11H-C30-37P (3m) FREQROL-A800/F800 10 inverters RS-422 GT11H-C60-37P (6m)
  • Page 550: Connecting To Md-Cx522-K(-A0)

    25.2.6 Connecting to MD-CX522-K(-A0)  When connecting to one inverter Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector conversion Inverter External cable Connection cable Inverter Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Communication conversion box model...
  • Page 551  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 10) (Using the distributor) Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO (1) When using the connector conversion box Inverter Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connector Distributor Distributor conversion Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) External cable Connection...
  • Page 552 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Inverter Inverter Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor External cable Terminal cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Connection Connection Inverter Distributor cable 1) cable 2) Number of Total Terminal External cable connectable distance Connection...
  • Page 553: Connection Diagram

    25.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS422 connection diagram 3) GOT and the inverter. Connector conversion FR-A5NR side side (terminal block) 25.3.1 RS-422 cable  Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1) Connector conversion Inverter or Distributor side (Modular connector) side Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR.
  • Page 554 RS422 connection diagram 9) RS422 connection diagram 6) RS485 terminal block External cable Distributor side Inverter side or distributor side (built into the inverter) GT11H-C side (Modular connector) (Modular connector) FG(Shield) Shield RDA1(RXD+) W/R (A) RDB1(RXD-) W/BK (A) GY/R (A) GY/BK (A) SDA1(TXD1+) O/R (A)
  • Page 555 RS422 connection diagram 13) RS422 connection diagram 10) Distributor side Connector conversion FR-E7TR side (terminal block) side Terminating resistor 100Ω 1/2W Turn ON (100Ω) the terminator switch of the FR-E7TR farthest from the GOT. RS422 connection diagram 11) FR-E7TR side External cable (terminal block) GT11H-C-37P side...
  • Page 556 RS422 connection diagram 14) FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side FR-A5NR side Connector conversion (terminal block) (terminal block) (terminal block) side Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in the FR-A5NR of the inverter located farthest from the GOT.
  • Page 557 RS422 connection diagram 17) Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485 Built-in RS-485 Connector conversion terminal block terminal block terminal block box side Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.n SDA2 SDA1 SDB1 RDB1 SDB2 RDA2 RDA1 RDA1 SDB1 RDB2 RDB1 SDA1 SDA2 SDA1 SDA2 SDB2 SDB2...
  • Page 558 RS422 connection diagram 20) FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side Connector conversion terminal block terminal block terminal block box side Station No.0 Station No.1 Station No.2 Turn ON (100Ω) the terminator switch of the FR-E7TR farthest from the GOT. RS422 connection diagram 21) FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side FR-E7TR side...
  • Page 559  (5) Terminal block layout in the FR-A5NR computer link Precautions when preparing a cable option (1) Cable length Attach this option to the A500 and F500 Series. The total distance (between GOT and inverters) of the RS-422 cable must be 13m or less. (2) Connector conversion box side connector Terminal block For the connector conversion box side connector, refer...
  • Page 560: Got Side Settings

    25.4 GOT Side Settings 25.4.1 Setting communication interface 25.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the connected equipment. Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps, transmission speed used for 19200bps, Transmission communication with the...
  • Page 561: Freqrol Series Inverter Side Settings

    25.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings For details of the inverter, refer to the manual of each 25.5.2 Connecting to FREQROL- series. E500 series 25.5.1 Connecting to FREQROL-  S500, S500E, or F500J series Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. ...
  • Page 562: Connecting To Freqrol-F500, F500L Series

    25.5.3 Connecting to FREQROL- 25.5.4 Connecting to FREQROL- F500, F500L series A500 or A500L series   Communication settings Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter.
  • Page 563: Connecting To Freqrol-V500 Or V500L Series

    25.5.5 Connecting to FREQROL- 25.5.6 Connecting to FREQROL- V500 or V500L series E700 or sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX) series  Communication settings  Make the communication settings of the inverter. Communication settings Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating Make the communication settings of the inverter.
  • Page 564: Connecting To Freqrol-D700/F700Pj Series

    25.5.7 Connecting to FREQROL- D700/F700PJ series HINT HINT HINT Automatic setting with Pr.999 (FREQROL-F700PJ  Communication settings series only) Make the communication settings of the inverter. If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating settings other than [PU communication station each parameter.
  • Page 565: Connecting To Freqrol-F700/F700P

    Parameter No. 25.5.8 Connecting to FREQROL- Set value Settings Setting item RS-485 F700/F700P connector terminal PU operation  connector mode Communication settings Operation mode selection Pr.79 External operation RS-485 Make the communication settings of the inverter. mode at power on Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating Refer to Pr.79 each parameter.
  • Page 566: Connecting To Freqrol-A700 Series

    Parameter No. 25.5.9 Connecting to FREQROL- Set value Settings Setting item RS-485 A700 series connector terminal PU operation mode Connector  Communication settings Operation mode Pr.79 selection External operation RS-485 Make the communication settings of the inverter. mode at power on Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating Refer to Pr.79 each parameter.
  • Page 567: Connecting Freqrol-A800/F800 Series

    25.5.10 Connecting FREQROL-A800/F800 series  Communication settings Make the communication settings of the inverter. Be sure to perform the inverter reset after updating each parameter. The GOT1000 series does not support the automatic connection of inverters. (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters GOT connection Parameters corresponding to inverter destination...
  • Page 568: Connecting Sensorless Servo (Freqrol-E700Ex Series)

    HINT HINT HINT Automatic setting with Pr.999 If Pr.999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and [Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side. Parameter No.
  • Page 569: Connecting To Md-Cx522-K(-A0)

    25.5.12 Connecting to MD-CX522- 25.5.13 Station number setting K(-A0) Set each station number so that no station number overlaps.  Communication settings The station number can be set without regard to the cable Make the communication settings of the inverter. connection order.
  • Page 570: Device Range That Can Be Set

    25.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 25.7 Precautions...
  • Page 571: Servo Amplifier Connection

    26. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 26.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model Clock Refer to type MR-J2S-A RS-232 MELSERVO-J2-Super MR-J2S-CP 26.2.1 RS-422 MR-J2S-CL MR-J2M-P8A RS-232 MELSERVO-J2M 26.2.1 RS-422 MR-J2M-DU MR-J3-A RS-232 MELSERVO-J3 RS-422 MR-J3-T 26.2.2 MR-J4-A RS-232...
  • Page 572: System Configuration

    26.2 System Configuration 26.2.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super or MELSERVO-J2M Series  When connecting via the RS-232 communication Communication driver MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector Servo conversion amplifier Connection cable External cable Servo amplifier Connection cable Number of Connector...
  • Page 573 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Servo amplifier External cable Servo amplifier Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Series name Communication type GT11H-C30 (3m) MELSERVO-J2-Super GT11H-C60 (6m) RS-232 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier MELSERVO-J2M RS232 connection diagram 3) Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3.
  • Page 574 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Servo Servo amplifier amplifier External cable Connection cable Servo amplifier Connection cable Total Number of connectable External cable Communication model distance equipment Series name Connection diagram number type GT11H-C30-37P (3m) Up to 32 axes for 1 GOT RS422 connection RS-422 GT11H-C60-37P (6m)
  • Page 575: Connecting To Melservo-J4 Or J3 Series

    Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. DSV-CABV is a product manufactured by Diatrend Corporation. For details, contact Diatrend Corporation. FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details, contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.
  • Page 576  When connecting to multiple servo amplifiers (RS-422 connection) Communication driver MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE (1) When using the connector conversion box Servo Servo amplifier amplifier Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connector Distributor Distributor conversion Terminal cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) External cable Terminal...
  • Page 577 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Servo Servo amplifier amplifier Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Distributor Distributor Terminal cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) External cable Terminal Connection Connection Connection Distributor Distributor Servo amplifier cable cable 1) cable 2) cable 3) Number of...
  • Page 578 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. FA-T-RS40VS is a product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. The cables (RS-PCATCBL-0.5M (0.5m), RS-422SCBL-2M (2m)) are packed together.
  • Page 579: Connecting To The Melservo-Je Super Series

    26.2.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-JE Super Series  When connecting via the RS-422 communication Communication driver MELSERVO-J4, J3, J2S/M, JE (1) When using the connector conversion box Servo Servo amplifier amplifier Connector conversion Connection cable External cable Servo amplifier Connection cable Number of Connector Total...
  • Page 580 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Servo Servo amplifier amplifier Connection cable Servo amplifier Total External cable Number of connectable equipment model distance Series name Communication type GT11H-C30 (3m) GT11H-C60 (6m) Up to 32 axes for 1 GOT RS-422 MELSERVO-JE GT11H-C100 (10m) (Multi-drop communication)
  • Page 581: Connection Diagram

    26.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 3) GOT and the servo amplifier. Connector for interface units or External cable servo amplifier's CN3 GT11H-C side 26.3.1 RS-232 cable FG(Shield) Shield Plate SD(TXD) W/R (A) ...
  • Page 582: Rs-422 Cable

    RS422 connection diagram 4) 26.3.2 RS-422 cable Servo amplifier side Distributor side (Modular connector) (Modular connector)  Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1) Servo amplifier side or Connector conversion Distributor side box side (Modular connector) Make the wiring between the distributor and servo amplifier as short as possible.
  • Page 583 RS422 connection diagram 5) Connector for Connector for Connector for interface units interface units interface units Connector conversion 1st axis servo 2nd axis servo 32nd axis (last axis) box side amplifier's CN3 amplifier's CN3 servo amplifier's CN3 RXD+(RDA) RXD-(RDB) TXD+(SDA) TXD-(SDB) SG(GND) RTS+(RSA)
  • Page 584 RS422 connection diagram 7) Connector for Connector for Connector for interface units interface units interface units 1st axis servo 2nd axis servo 32nd axis (last axis) amplifier's CN3 amplifier's CN3 servo amplifier's CN3 External cable GT11H-C side O/R (A) O/BK (A) W/R (A) W/BK (A) PK/R (A)
  • Page 585 RS422 connection diagram 10) Connector for Connector for Connector for interface units interface units interface units 1st axis servo 2nd axis servo 32nd axis (last axis) amplifier's CN3 amplifier's CN3 servo amplifier's CN3 External cable GT11H-C-37P side 3,28 3,28 3,28 30,34 30,34 30,34...
  • Page 586 (a) Modular connector of the servo amplifier  Precautions when preparing a cable • Pin layout in the Modular connector (1) Cable length When seen from the front of the servo amplifier (receptacle side) The total distance (between GOT and controllers) of RS-422 cable must be 13m or less.
  • Page 587: Got Side Settings

    26.4 GOT Side Settings 26.4.1 Setting communication interface 26.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Item Description Range Set the channel of the connected equipment. 9600bps, Set this item when change the 19200bps, Transmission transmission speed used for 38400bps,...
  • Page 588: Setting On Servo Amplifier Side

    26.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side Model Refer to POINT POINT POINT MELSERVO-J2-Super Series 26.5.1 MELSERVO-J2M Series 26.5.2 (1) Parameter setting MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series 26.5.3 Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo 26.5.1 Connecting to the amplifier or setup software.
  • Page 589: Connecting To The Melservo-J2M Series

    26.5.2 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2M series POINT POINT POINT (1) Parameter setting Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch POINT POINT POINT provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier or setup software. MELSERVO-J2M Series For details of the MELSERVO-J2M series, refer to the following manual.
  • Page 590: Connecting To The Melservo-J4, J3, Or Je Series

    26.5.3 Connecting to the 26.5.4 Station number setting MELSERVO-J4, J3, or JE Set each station number so that no station number Series overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive.
  • Page 591: Device Range That Can Be Set

    26.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 26.7 Precautions...
  • Page 592 26 - 22 26. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 26.7 Precautions...
  • Page 593: Robot Controller Connection

    27. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 27.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model Clock Refer to type CRnD-700 CR750-D Ethernet 27.2.1 Robot controller CR751-D For details on the connection with CRnQ-700/CR750-Q/CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU), refer to MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS (Chapter 19 to 23).
  • Page 594: Got Side Settings

    27.3 GOT Side Settings 27.3.1 Setting communication interface 27.3.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the connected equipment. Item Description Range Set the network No. of the GOT. GOT NET No. 1 to 239 (Default: 1) Set the station No.
  • Page 595: Ethernet Setting

    27.3.3 Ethernet setting Item Description Range The host is displayed. Host (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*).) Set the network No. of the connected N/W No. Ethernet module. 1 to 239 (Default: blank) Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module.
  • Page 596: Plc Side Setting

    27.4 PLC Side Setting (2) For R32TB or R56TB Model Refer to Robot controller CRnD-700 27.4.1 27.4.1 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) This section describes the settings of a GOT and a robot controller in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT...
  • Page 597: Device Range That Can Be Set

    Ping command. 27.5 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 27.6 Precautions...
  • Page 598 27 - 6 27. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 27.6 Precautions...
  • Page 599: Cnc Connection

    28. CNC CONNECTION 28.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model Clock Refer to type RS-232 28.2.1 FCA C6 RS-422 MELDAS C6/C64 FCA C64 Ethernet 28.2.2 Use the NC system software version D0 or later. For the connection to CNC C70, refer to MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS (Chapter 19 to Chapter 23).
  • Page 600 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) MELDAS F311 cable C6/C64 Connection cable External cable Connection cable Total Number of External cable distance connectable Communication model Model F311 cable Cable model equipment type RS-232 GT11H-C30-37P (3m) MELDAS C6/C64 RS232 connection diagram 2) 1 GOT for 1 GT11H-C30-37P (3m) RS-422...
  • Page 601: Ethernet Connection

    28.2.2 Ethernet connection Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC),Q17nNC,CRnD-700 (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector Expansion MELDAS conversion unit C6/C64 External cable Connection cable Connection cable Maximum Number of Connector segment connectable External cable Expansion Communication conversion box model Model Cable model length equipment unit...
  • Page 602: Connection Diagram

    28.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 3) GOT and the CNC. MELDAS C6/C64 side External cable (20 pin half pitch) GT11H-C side 28.3.1 RS-232 cable FG(Shield) Shield SD(TXD)  W/R (A) Connection Diagram ER(DTR) W/BK (A) RS232 connection diagram 1)
  • Page 603: Got Side Settings

    28.4 GOT Side Settings 28.4.1 Setting communication interface 28.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the connected equipment. (1) AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* Item Description Range 4800bps, Set this item when change the transmission 9600bps, Transmission speed used for communication with the...
  • Page 604: Ethernet Setting

    (2) Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 POINT POINT POINT Item Description Range Set the network No. of the GOT. (1) Communication interface setting by Utility GOT NET No. 1 to 239 (Default: 1) The communication interface setting can be Set the station No. of the GOT. changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] 1 to 64 GOT PLC No.
  • Page 605: Cnc Side Settings

    28.5 CNC Side Settings 28.5.1 Ethernet Connection  Parameter setting  System configuration Set parameters related to Ethernet with MELSEC’s peripheral devices in the same way as parameter The following shows the example of the system setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on CNC by configuration when using the CNC monitor function.
  • Page 606 (b) Example of GX Developer setting (2) CNC side parameter setting Confirm the CNC side parameter setting with the settings of IP address, gateway address, subnet mask and port No. by the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side. For details of the parameter setting operation, refer to the following.
  • Page 607 MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTION FUNCTION 29. MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTION FUNCTION ..29 - 1...
  • Page 609: Connectable Model List

    29. MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTION FUNCTION 29.1 Connectable Model List For details of connectable models, refer to the following. 21. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 22. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 29.2 System Configuration 29.2.1 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-232 interface Communication driver Communication driver MELSEC-FX Serial (MELSEC)
  • Page 610 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) (1st) (2nd) Connection cable External cable Varies according to the connection type Connection cable GOT (2nd) Number of (1st) External cable connectable Communication Communication Max. equipment Connection type Model Cable model Model type type distance For the system...
  • Page 611: Connecting The Got To Plc Via Rs-422 Interface

    29.2.2 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-422 interface Communication driver Communication driver MELSEC-FX Serial (MELSEC) (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector conversion (1st) (2nd) Connection cable External cable Varies according to the connection type Connection cable GOT (2nd) Connector Number of (1st)
  • Page 612 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) (1st) (2nd) External cable Varies according to the connection type External cable GOT (2nd) Number of (1st) connectable Communication Communication Max. equipment Connection type Model Model type type distance For the system configuration between the GT11H-C30 (3m) GOT and PLC, refer to the following.
  • Page 613: Connection Diagram

    29.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 3) GOT and the PLC. External cable GT14 Handy side GT11H-C side FG(Shield) RD(RXD) Shield 29.3.1 RS-232 cable SD(TXD) RS(RTS) W/R (A) ER(DTR) W/BK (A) ...
  • Page 614: Rs-422 Cable

    (3) External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side, refer to the following. 8.2 External Cable, Relay Cable RS422 connection diagram 2) External cable GT14 Handy side GT11H-C-37P side FG(Shield) RS422 connection diagram 3) External cable GT14 Handy side GT11H-C-37P side...
  • Page 615: Got Side Settings

    29.4 GOT Side Settings 29.4.1 Setting communication (2) Settings of communication interface connecting to the second GOT interface (Communication settings) This section explains with an example of the following system configuration. 2nd GOT Direct connection to CPU 1st GOT RS-232 RS-422 Cable Cable...
  • Page 616: Communication Detail Settings

    29.4.2 Communication detail settings  Setting for the second GOT Set the communication interface connecting to the first Make the settings according to the usage environment. GOT. (1) Serial (MELSEC) Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for Click! communication with the connected 9600bps,...
  • Page 617 (2) MELSEC-FX Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected 9600bps, equipment. 19200bps, Transmission (Default: 115200bps) 38400bps, Speed When the setting exceeds the limit of 57600bps, the connected equipment, 115200bps communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment Set the number of retries to be...
  • Page 618: Precautions

    29.5 Precautions   GOT's communication timing Using the FA transparent function When multiple GOTs are connected, the FA transparent (1) GOT's communication timing function is not available even if the USB interface is Adjust the communication timing so that, after applying used for the connection.
  • Page 619 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 30. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION..... . 30 - 1...
  • Page 621: What Is Multi-Channel Function?

    GOT. The GT14 Handy GOT can monitor up to two channels of controllers on one GOT only when the GOT is used with the Ethernet connection. For the serial connection, the GOT monitors only one channel of controllers on one GOT.
  • Page 622: System Configuration

    30.2 System Configuration Multiple Ethernet connections can be made with one GOT.  System configuration Communication driver Communication driver Ethernet(MELSEC), MELSEC-FX Q17nNC, CRnD-700 Ethernet connection FXCPU Connection cable (Channel No.1) Ethernet connection QCPU Connection cable (Channel No.2) Number of connectable Connection type Connection cable equipment...
  • Page 623: Got Side Settings

    30.3 GOT Side Settings A general flow of operation from system selection for the multi-channel function to drawing is explained in 30.3.1 to 30.3.5. It is recommended to refer to 30.3.1 to 30.3.5 when making necessary settings using the multi-channel function for the first time.
  • Page 624: Determining The Connection Type And Channel No. (System Selection)

    30.3.2 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection)  Determining the connection type The combinations of the Ethernet connections are available as shown in the following table. Ethernet connection • Ethernet connection • Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection) ...
  • Page 625: Determining The Got Side Interface (Interface Selection)

    30.3.3 Determining the GOT side interface (Interface selection) Use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT. Ethernet interface For the connection via the connection type selected in 30.3.2, select interfaces to be used. Select the interfaces according to the connection type by referring to the following. Selected connection type Reference for required interface and communication unit •...
  • Page 626  GOT interface used for Ethernet connection For the Ethernet connection, use the following interface built in the GOT. Type Interface built in GOT Interface built in GOT Ethernet interface Up to two channels can be used. POINT POINT POINT When using Ethernet download and gateway function The Ethernet download and the gateway function are available with the Ethernet interface built in the GOT (one channel).
  • Page 627 Write down the following items to the check sheet. 30.5 Multi-channel function check sheet After writing down the names of communication units, write down the CH No. to be assigned to each communication interface, based on the entry in  Check Sheet No. 1 (selection of connection type and interface).
  • Page 628: Setting For Communication Settings

    30.3.4 Setting for communication settings Make the communication settings in the interface to be used. Ethernet interface Make settings for Communication Settings by GT Designer3 referring to the check sheet where the necessary information has been written. The position that the settings should be made on the communication settings screen are specified on the check sheet by numbers.
  • Page 629: Items To Be Checked Before Starting Drawing

    30.3.5 Items to be checked before starting drawing The following describes that should be understood before starting drawing and the functions that should be set beforehand when using the multi-channel function.  Device settings It is necessary to set the device to be used together with the CH No. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Click the device setting button.
  • Page 630  FA transparent function Set the controller for which the FA transparent function should be executed by the CH No. 31.5.1 Setting communication interface The set CH No. can be changed by the Utility. To execute the FA transparent function for other CH No., change the CH No. using the Utility. CH No.1 FXCPU CH No.2...
  • Page 631: Precautions

    30.4 Precautions 30.4.1 Precautions for use  Occurrence of the same system alarm at different channels When the advanced system alarm is used, if the system alarms with the same error code occur in different channels the GOT treats the alarms as the same system alarm. Therefore, if the system alarms with the same error code occur one by one, the time of later system alarm occurrence is not reflected to the GOT.
  • Page 632: Multi-Channel Function Check Sheet

    30.5 Multi-channel function check sheet This section provides the check sheet to be used for Communication Settings when the multi-channel function is used. 30.3.2 to 30.3.4 contain explanations of the items to be checked on the check sheet. Checking items explained in these sections using the check sheet on the following page allows you to complete the setting for the multi-channel function.
  • Page 633  Check sheet No.1 (selection of connection type and interface) Channel No. of controller (CH No.1 to 2) Selection of connection type Interface selection 30.3.2) 30.3.3) Connection name Connection name 30 - 13 30. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 30.5 Multi-channel function check sheet...
  • Page 634  Check sheet No. 2 (selection of GOT side interface) Assigning the channel No. Ethernet interface (only one connection) Connecting a controller (Without multi-channel Ethernet connection) CH No. Driver name Connecting a controller (With multi-channel Ethernet connection) CH No. Driver name Multi Multi-channel Ethernet connection CH No.
  • Page 635 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 31. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION ....31 - 1...
  • Page 637: Fa Transparent Function

    31. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 31.1 FA Transparent Function The FA transparent function allows the sequence programs of the Mitsubishi PLC to be read, written and monitored from a PC connected via a GOT. USB cable RS-232/RS-422 cable Ethernet connection cable Sequence program can be read, written, monitored, etc.
  • Page 638  When connecting the GOT and PC with USB (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU Software FX5U, FX5UC GX Works3 , MX Component , MX Sheet MELSOFT Navigator GX Developer , GX Works2...
  • Page 639 CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Version 1.04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function. MR Configurator2 Version 1.09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function. A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection. MX Component Version 4.00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function.
  • Page 640 (3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. PLC CPU Software RCPU GX Works3, MX Component , MX Sheet Motion controller CPU MT Works2 , MX Component , MX Sheet (MELSEC iQ-R Series) C Controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series) CW Configurator...
  • Page 641: List Of Models That Can Be Monitored

    31.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored The following models support FA transparent function.  When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Connection type Series Model Target software Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection R04CPU R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU...
  • Page 642 Connection type Series Model Target software Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection Q00JCPU Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU (Main base) Q25PRHCPU (Main base) Q12PRHCPU (Extension base) Q25PRHCPU (Extension base) Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU MELSEC-Q...
  • Page 643 Connection type Series Model Target software Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection MELSEC-QS QS001CPU L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU GX Developer L06CPU-P GX Works2 GX LogViewer L26CPU-P MELSEC-L MX Component L26CPU-BT MX Sheet L02CPU-P CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool L26CPU-PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU-P Q02CPU-A...
  • Page 644 Connection type Series Model Target software Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU GX Developer MELSEC-A MX Component A2SCPU (AnSCPU) MX Sheet A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU-S3 A1SJHCPU A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU-DC24 A2CCPU GX Developer MELSEC-A A2CCPUP21 MX Component MX Sheet A2CCPUR21...
  • Page 645 Connection type Series Model Target software Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection A171SCPU-S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN Motion controller GX Developer A172SHCPU MX Component (A Series) MX Sheet A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU-S1 GX Developer GX Works2 FX Configurator-FP MX Component MX Sheet MELSEC-FX GX Developer FX Configurator-FP...
  • Page 646 Connection type Series Model Target software Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC-Link IE field GX Works2 Network Ethernet NZ2GF-ETB MX Component adapter module GX Developer CNC C70 (Q173NCCPU) NC Configurator MELDAS C6/C64 GX Developer CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU) CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU) Robot controller RT ToolBox2...
  • Page 647: System Configuration

    31.4 System Configuration 31.4.1 GX Works3, CW Configurator, GX Works2, GX Developer, GX LogViewer, MX Component, MX Sheet, CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool, Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module  When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Communication driver Connection type dependant Connection cable...
  • Page 648: Px Developer, Gx Configurator

    31.4.2 PX Developer, GX Configurator Communication driver Connection type dependant Connection cable Varies according to the connection type. Connection cable Number of connectable Max. Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software equipment distance For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, refer to the following.
  • Page 649: Mt Developer, Mt Works2

    31.4.3 MT Developer, MT Works2  When connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB Communication driver RCPU + Motion controller CPU Connection type (MELSEC iQ-R series) dependant QCPU + Motion controller CPU (Q series) Connection cable Varies according to the connection type.
  • Page 650: Mr Configurator, Mr Configurator2

    31.4.4 MR Configurator, MR Configurator2  When connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB Communication driver Connection type dependant RCPU + Motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) QCPU + Servo Servo Motion controller amplifier amplifier CPU (Q series) Connection cable Varies according to the connection type.
  • Page 651: Fr Configurator

    31.4.5 FR Configurator Communication driver FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO Inverter Inverter Connection cable Varies according to the connection type. Inverter Connection cable Number of connectable Max. Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software equipment distance For details on the system configuration between 1 personal GOT and Mitsubishi inverter, refer to the following.
  • Page 652: Rt Toolbox2

    31.4.7 RT ToolBox2 Communication driver CRnQ-700 CRnD-700 Connection type dependant Connection cable Varies according to the connection type. Connection cable Number of connectable Max. Connection type Model Interface Cable model Software equipment distance For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC, 1 personal refer to the following.
  • Page 653: Got Side Settings

    31.5 GOT Side Settings 31.5.1 Setting communication interface  Communication setting with personal  computer Controller setting Set the communication setting between the GOT and the Set the channel of the connected equipment. personal computer. Select [Common] [Peripheral Setting] (DataTransfer)] from the menu. The setting dialog box is displayed.
  • Page 654 Item Description Range  GOT Setup IP Label Set the IP label of the detail settings. When using the multi-channel function, specify the channel Set the subnet mask for the sub network. No. on which the FA transparent function is executed. (Only for connection via router) Subnet 0.0.0.0 to...
  • Page 655: Personal Computer Side Setting

    31.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 31.6.1 Accessing by GX Works3 The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX Works3.  When connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection (a) When connecting to RCPU Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display...
  • Page 656 Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module. Specify the IP address for [IP Address] same as the IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module. Double-click [Serial USB] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial Setting].
  • Page 657 (2) Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection(for FX5U/FX5UC only) By clicking [Setting], the [GOT (Ethernet) transparent Click [Online] [Specify Connection Destination] on setting] is displayed. GX Works3. Here, set the built-in Ethernet port CPU , which is firstly connected via a GOT.
  • Page 658 (3) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to RJ71C24) Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Click [Online] [Connection Destination] on GX Check-mark [via GOT (direct coupled) transparent Works3.
  • Page 659: Accessing By Cw Configurator

    31.6.2 Accessing by CW Configurator Check-mark [C24] in [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of The following shows the procedure to set the FA GOT]. transparent function of CW Configurator.  When connecting the GOT and personal computer with USB (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection The screen returns to the [Connection Channel Setup].
  • Page 660 Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module. Specify the IP address for [IP Address] same as the IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
  • Page 661: Accessing The Plc By Gx Developer, Px Developer, Or Gx Configurator

    31.6.3 Accessing the PLC by GX Developer, PX Developer, or GX Configurator The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX Developer. GX Configurator is an add-on software of GX Developer. (Except for GX Configurator-QP)  Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct connection (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode))
  • Page 662  Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to QJ71C24(N)) (GX Configurator is not supported.) Double-click [Serial] of the PC side I/F to display [PC side I/F Serial setting]. Check the following for [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox.
  • Page 663  Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) Double-click [PLC module] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module]. Click [Online] [Read from PLC] in GX Developer. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module], Set the [PLC Series] to [QCPU(Q mode)].
  • Page 664  Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct connection (when connecting to FXCPU) Specify the IP address assigned to the built-in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module for [IP address]. The screen returns to [Transfer Setup]. Click to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU (Q mode).
  • Page 665: Accessing By Gx Works2

    31.6.4 Accessing by GX Works2 The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX Works2.  When connecting the GOT and PC with USB (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection (a) Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) The screen returns to the [Transfer Setup].
  • Page 666 (b) Connecting to FXCPU Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display Set the [Transfer Setup]: [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
  • Page 667 Set [FX3U-ENET-ADP] or [Ethernet Module] for [PLC Type]. Specify the IP address assigned to [FX3U-ENET- ADP] or [Ethernet Module]. The screen returns to the [Transfer Setup]. Click the to check if GX Developer has been connected to the FXCPU. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
  • Page 668 (2) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to QJ71C24(N)) Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Navigation window of GX Works2.
  • Page 669 (3) Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark Navigation window of GX Works2.
  • Page 670 (4) Connecting the GOT and Ethernet adapter (NZ2GF- ETB) in Ethernet connection, and connecting it to a PLC in the CC-Link IE Field Network Specify the number for [Network No.] and [Station No.] same as the number assigned to the Ethernet This section describes the settings of GX Works2 in the module.
  • Page 671 Click the Connection Destination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. Set the [CPU mode] to [LCPU] for [PLC side I/F Set the [Transfer Setup]: Detailed Setting of GOT].
  • Page 672 (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to QJ71C24(N)) Return to [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT] and click [OK]. Click the Connection Destination view [Connection The [Transfer Setup] is displayed. Click [Other Station Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the (Single Network)].
  • Page 673: Accessing By Gx Logviewer

    31.6.5 Accessing by GX LogViewer The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX LogViewer. Click [Show Assistant Dialog] for [View] on GX LogViewer. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display The [Assistant] dialog box is displayed. [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT].
  • Page 674: Accessing Plc By Fx Gx Configurator-Qp

    31.6.6 Accessing PLC by FX GX Configurator-QP The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of GX Configurator-QP. Set the [PLC] in [Connection setup]. PLC type: Q series PLC type Multi PLC specification: Non-choice/No.1 to 4 Mark the [via GOT transparent mode] checkbox. Click [Transfer setup] for [Online] on GX Configurator- Direct CPU connection Interface: PLC...
  • Page 675: Accessing By The Mt Developer

    31.6.7 Accessing by the MT Developer This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of MT Developer with an example of connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series). Check-mark the following in [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module]. Click [Communication] [Communication Setting] in Direct CPU connection...
  • Page 676: Accessing By Mt Works2

    31.6.8 Accessing by MT Works2 This section explains the procedure to set the FA Check the following for [PC side I/F Serial Setting]. transparent function of MT Works2 with an example of connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series). When connecting the GOT and PC with USB ...
  • Page 677: Accessing The Servo Amplifier By The Mr Configurator

    31.6.9 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator Check-mark the [GOT Transparent Communication]. Make the FA transparent settings in the communication Click the [OK]. setting of MT Developer. For details of MT Developer, refer to the following. 31.6.7 Accessing by the MT Developer 31.6.10 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2 Make the FA transparent settings in the MT Works2...
  • Page 678: Accessing Plc By Fx Configurator-Fp

    31.6.12 Accessing PLC by FX 31.6.13 Accessing by FX -ENET-L Configurator-FP Configuration tool This section explains the procedure to set the FA This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of FX Configurator-FP with an transparent function of the FX -ENET-L Configuration example of connecting to FXCPU.
  • Page 679: Accessing By Rt Toolbox2

    31.6.14 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of RT ToolBox2 with an example of connecting to CRnQ-700.  Connecting the GOT and controller in direct CPU connection (CRnQ-700 only) Check-mark the following in [Serial port]. When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Mark the [USB] checkbox.
  • Page 680  Connecting the GOT and controller in Ethernet connection Check-mark the following in [PLC side I/F Detailed setting of PLC module]. Right-click a project name to be a target on the project tree of RT ToolBox2. Ethernet connection Click [Edit Project]. [via GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode] Clicking [Setting].
  • Page 681: Accessing By Nc Configurator

    31.6.15 Accessing by NC Configurator 31.6.16 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of NC Configurator. The following explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of MELSOFT Navigator. Click [Online] [Batch Read].
  • Page 682: Accessing By The Cpu Module Logging Configuration Tool

    31.6.17 Accessing by the CPU Module 31.6.18 Accessing by Setting/ Logging Configuration Tool Monitoring tool for C Controller module The following shows the procedure to set the FA transparent function of the QnUDVCPU•LCPU Logging The following shows the procedure to set the FA Configuration Tool.
  • Page 683 Double-click [GOT] of the CPU side I/F to display [CPU side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. On the [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT], mark the [via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode] checkbox. By clicking [Set], the [GOT (Ethernet) transparent setting] is displayed. Here, set the C Controller module (Q Series) (Q24DHCCPU-V), which is firstly connected via a GOT.
  • Page 684: Precautions

    31.7 Precautions 31.7.1 Precautions common to each  software When monitoring the PLC CPU from a PC When monitoring the PLC CPU from a PC, the GOT  and PC refresh the display slower. GOT interface required to use the FA transparent function ...
  • Page 685: When Using Gx Works3, Gx Works2, Gx Developer

    31.7.2 When using GX Works3, GX  When the FA transparent function is used in Works2, GX Developer an Ethernet connection (1) GX Developer function or GX Works2 function  When connecting to QCPU (A mode) When the FA transparent function is used in an When connecting to QCPU (A mode), set the PLC type Ethernet connection, the following GX Developer to "A4UCPU"...
  • Page 686 • Reading the special module monitor CPU  When performing [Read to PLC], [Write to Malfunction log PLC] and other file operations on GX Error messages on Corrective action Works3, GX Works2, GX Developer Error Corrective action GX Works3, GX on GX Works3, GX messages on If any of the following GOT functions is executed during...
  • Page 687: When Using Mt Works2, Mt Developer

    31.7.4 When using MR Configurator2,  When PLC write is failed while using the FA MR Configurator transparent function The execution of PLC write using the FA transparent  Unavailable functions and restrictions function may be failed due to some reason such as cable disconnection.
  • Page 688 31 - 52 31. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 31.7 Precautions...
  • Page 689: Appendix.1 External Dimensions

    APPENDICES Appendix.1 External Dimensions External dimensions of Handy GOT 145 (5.71") 79.3 (3.13") Unit: mm (inch) App - 1 APPENDICES Appendix.1 External Dimensions...
  • Page 690 External dimensions of external cables Unit : mm (inch) GT14H-C-42P About 70 (2.76") About 50 (1.97") Label 9.4 (0.38") 28 (1.11") Handy GOT side Connector conversion box side GT11H-C-37P (0.63") About 70 (2.76") 45 (1.78") Label 9.4 (0.38") 28 (1.11") M2.6 Handy GOT side Relay cable side...
  • Page 691 Unit : mm (inch) GT11H-C-32P About 70 (2.76") About 70 (2.76") Label  9.4 (0.38")  28 (1.11")  28 (1.11") Handy GOT side CC-Link interface unit side Value of  Length L mm (inch) 3000 (118.11") 5000 (196.85") 8000 (314.96") 13000 (511.81") App - 3 APPENDICES...
  • Page 692 External dimensions of relay cables GT11H- 1500 (59.06") Label 6 40 (1.58") (0.24") about 48 200 (7.88") (1.89") (0.63") Lead wire Label for grounding 500 (19.69") GT11H-C15R4-25P 1500 (59.06") Label 16 (0.63") M2.6 8 200 (7.88") 53 (2.09") (0.32") (1.42") (0.63") Lead wire Label...
  • Page 693 External dimensions of Connector Conversion Box GT16H-CNB-42S 56 (2.21") 55 (2.17") 110 (4.34") ES1A ES1B ES2A ES2B ES3A ES3B ES1A ES1B ES2A ES2B ES3A ES3B - INPUT 24VDC + ID No. RS-232 RS-422 10BASE-T SW-COM KSW1 DSW1 DSW2 100BASE-TX KSW-COM KSW2 DSW1 DSW2 GT16H-CNB-37S...
  • Page 694 External dimensions of Connector Conversion Box Mounting Bracket Drill 3-4.5 32 (1.25") 32 (1.25") (0.39") 30 (1.19") 30 (1.19") 82 (3.23") External dimensions of With wall-mounting Attachment 106(4.18″) 4-4.5(With wall-mounting 60(2.37″) Attachment mounting hole) Post 58.5(2.31″) Unit:mm(inches) App - 6 APPENDICES Appendix.1 External Dimensions...
  • Page 695: Appendix.2 Usage Condition Of Utility Function

    The function which can be used differs according to the GOT type. Moreover, there are the function which can be set with drawing software and the function which cannot be set. : Applicable : Not applicable - : Not required GT16 GT14 GT11 Refere Item Functions overview...
  • Page 696 : Applicable : Not applicable - : Not required GT16 GT14 GT11 Refere Item Functions overview Handy Handy Handy System monitor Ladder monitor Network monitor Intelligent module monitor Servo amplifier monitor Motion monitor Motion SFC monitor Monitor screens 1 CNC monitor...
  • Page 697 : Applicable : Not applicable - : Not required GT16 GT14 GT11 Refere Item Functions overview Handy Handy Handy Deleting or copying alarm log files Converting alarm log files in G1A format CSV/TXT Alarm information format Displaying graphs of alarm log files...
  • Page 698 App - 10 APPENDICES Appendix.2 Usage Condition of Utility Function...
  • Page 699: Appendix.3 Transportation Precautions

    Appendix.3 Transportation Precautions When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations. Appendix.3.1 Relevant models The battery for the GOT1000 Series is classified as shown in the table below. Product name Model Description Handled as Battery for GOT1000 Series GT11-BAT Lithium battery...
  • Page 700 JY997D50202 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
  • Page 701 If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customer’s expense. The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
  • Page 702 GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
  • Page 707: Safety Precautions

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING"...
  • Page 708 [DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● The display section is an analog-resistive type touch panel. If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more, the switch that is located around the center of the touched point, if any, may operate. Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously.
  • Page 709 [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to/from the panel. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. ●...
  • Page 710 [WIRING PRECAUTIONS] WARNING ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring. Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions. ● Please make sure to ground FG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying 100 or less which is used exclusively for the GOT.
  • Page 711 Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction. ● Replace battery with GT11-50BAT by Mitsubishi electric Co. only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. ● Dispose of used battery promptly.
  • Page 712 [DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● When disposing of the product, handle it as industrial waste. ● When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to the User's Manual of the GOT to be used.) [TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION...
  • Page 713: Introduction

    Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use. CONTENTS GT14 Handy GOT User's Manual 1/2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................A - 1 INTRODUCTION ............................A - 7 CONTENTS .............................. A - 7 MANUALS...............................A - 33...
  • Page 714 Applicable With wall-mounting Attachment................. 6 - 34 6.7.2 Mounting ..........................6 - 34 6.7.3 Attachment of GT14 handy GOT ..................6 - 35 7. INSTALLATION Installing Procedure ......................... 7 - 1 7.1.1 Holding the Handy GOT in hand................... 7 - 1 7.1.2...
  • Page 715 9. HANDLING OF POWER WIRING AND SWITCH Internal Wiring Diagram of GT14 Handy..................9 - 3 Power Wiring ........................... 9 - 4 9.2.1 Power wiring and grounding ....................9 - 4 9.2.2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring/Remedy ............... 9 - 5 Wiring inside and outside the panel....................
  • Page 716: Vnc(R) Server Function Setting

    12.2 Operation Setting (Settings Regarding Operation) ................ 12 - 7 12.2.1 Operation setting functions ....................12 - 7 12.2.2 Display operation of Operation ................... 12 - 8 12.2.3 Setting operation of operation..................... 12 - 9 12.2.4 Security level change......................12 - 10 12.2.5 Utility Call Key Setting ......................
  • Page 717: Connectable Model List

    15.2.4 Touch panel check ......................15 - 12 15.2.5 I/O check .......................... 15 - 14 15.2.6 Ethernet status check ....................... 15 - 18 15.3 System Alarm Display........................15 - 20 15.4 GOT start time ..........................15 - 22 16. CLEANING DISPLAY SECTION (CLEAN) 17.
  • Page 718: Connecting Serial Communication Module (Melsec Iq-R Series)

    21.2 System Configuration ........................21 - 4 21.2.1 Connecting to QCPU ......................21 - 4 21.2.2 Connecting to LCPU ......................21 - 5 21.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU...................... 21 - 7 21.2.4 Connecting to ACPU......................21 - 8 21.2.5 Connecting to MELSEC iQ-F Series................... 21 - 9 21.2.6 Connecting to FXCPU ......................
  • Page 719: Connection To C Controller Module (Melsec Iq-R Series)

    23.1.2 Ethernet module ......................... 23 - 4 23.2 System Configuration ........................23 - 5 23.2.1 Connecting to Ethernet module ..................23 - 5 23.2.2 Connection to Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C controller module........23 - 9 23.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F ....................23 - 11 23.2.4 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module .........
  • Page 720 24.6 Precautions ..........................24 - 16 MITSUBISHI FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS 25. INVERTER CONNECTION 25.1 Connectable Model List ......................... 25 - 1 25.2 System Configuration ........................25 - 2 25.2.1 Connecting to FREQROL-A500/A500L/F500/F500L/V500/V500L ........25 - 2 25.2.2 Connecting to FREQROL-E500/S500/S500E/F500J/D700/F700PJ ........25 - 7 25.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700/sensorless servo (FREQROL-E700EX)......
  • Page 721: Connection Diagram

    26.5.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4, J3, or JE Series ............26 - 20 26.5.4 Station number setting...................... 26 - 20 26.6 Device Range that Can Be Set....................26 - 21 26.7 Precautions..........................26 - 21 27. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 27.1 Connectable Model List .........................
  • Page 722: Fx Configurator-Fp, Fx3U-Enet-L Configuration Tool

    MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 30. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 30.1 What is Multi-channel Function?....................30 - 1 30.2 System Configuration ........................30 - 2 30.3 GOT Side Settings ......................... 30 - 3 30.3.1 General flow from system selection to drawing ..............30 - 3 30.3.2 Determining the connection type and channel No.
  • Page 723: Connection Diagram

    Appendix.3 Transportation Precautions .....................App - 11 Appendix.3.1 Relevant models......................App - 11 Appendix.3.2 Transportation guidelines ...................App - 11 GT14 Handy GOT User's Manual 2/2 CONNECTIONS TO NON-MITSUBISHI PRODUCTS 32. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 32.1 Connectable Model List ......................... 32 - 1 32.2...
  • Page 724: Connecting To The Thermac Neo Series

    33.2.5 System configuration for connecting to C200HS, C200H, C200HX, C200HG, or C200HE ........................33 - 14 33.2.6 System configuration for connecting to CS1H, CS1G, or CS1D ........33 - 17 33.2.7 System configuration for connecting to C1000H or C2000H ..........33 - 20 33.2.8 System configuration for connecting to CV500, CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1 ....
  • Page 725: Connection Diagram

    35.2.3 Connecting to KV-1000 ...................... 35 - 7 35.2.4 Connecting to KV-700 ...................... 35 - 10 35.2.5 Connection diagram ......................35 - 13 35.2.6 GOT side settings ......................35 - 16 35.2.7 PLC side setting ....................... 35 - 17 35.3 Ethernet Connection ........................
  • Page 726: Got Side Settings

    37.5 PLC Side Setting ......................... 37 - 18 37.5.1 Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JG-P, PC3JD, PC3JD-C, PC3J, PC3JL, PC2J, PC2JS or PC2JR .......................... 37 - 18 37.5.2 Connecting to PC2JC ....................... 37 - 18 37.5.3 Connecting to PC2J16P or PC2J16PR ................37 - 19 37.5.4 RS-232/RS-422 interface converter setting ..............
  • Page 727 39.5 Indicating Controller Side Setting ....................39 - 10 39.5.1 Connecting to ACS-13A, DCL- 33A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301- M, PCD-300 Series, PC-900 Series (PC-955-/M, C5, PC- 935-/M, C5) ............. 39 - 10 39.5.2 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR- 100, FCR-23A, FIR Series, PC-900 Series (PC-955-/M, C, PC-935-/M, C) ...................
  • Page 728: Station Number Setting

    41.2.5 PLC side setting........................ 41 - 11 41.3 Ethernet Connection ........................41 - 12 41.3.1 Connecting to Unified Controller nv Series............... 41 - 12 41.3.2 GOT side settings ......................41 - 13 41.3.3 PLC side setting........................ 41 - 14 41.3.4 Precautions........................
  • Page 729: Device Range That Can Be Set

    44.2.4 Connecting to FP3 or FP5 ....................44 - 8 44.2.5 Connecting to FP10(S) ..................... 44 - 11 44.2.6 Connecting to FP-M(C20TC) or FP-M(C32TC) ..............44 - 14 44.2.7 Connecting to FP10SH ..................... 44 - 16 44.2.8 Connecting to FPΣ......................44 - 18 44.2.9 Connecting to FP-X ......................
  • Page 730: Temperature Controller Side Setting

    47.2 Serial Connection .......................... 47 - 2 47.2.1 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX-F55 ............47 - 2 47.2.2 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX-F70 ............47 - 7 47.2.3 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX-F120S/140S/15[]S ......47 - 13 47.2.4 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX-SX SPH ..........
  • Page 731: Precautions

    49.2.8 GOT side settings ......................49 - 19 49.2.9 PLC side setting ....................... 49 - 20 49.3 Ethernet Connection ........................49 - 23 49.3.1 System configuration for connecting to MP-920 or MP2200 or MP2300 or MP2300S or CP-9200SH or CP-312 or CP-317..................49 - 23 49.3.2 GOT side settings ......................
  • Page 732: Station Number Setting

    51.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting ................... 51 - 25 51.5.1 Connecting to GREEN Series................... 51 - 25 51.5.2 Connecting to UT100 Series..................... 51 - 25 51.5.3 Connecting to UT2000 Series................... 51 - 25 51.5.4 Connecting to UTAdvanced Series................... 51 - 26 51.5.5 Connecting to converter (ML2-)..................
  • Page 733: Device Range That Can Be Set

    52.7 Precautions..........................52 - 44 53. CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 53.1 Connectable Model List ......................... 53 - 1 53.2 System Configuration ........................53 - 2 53.2.1 Connecting to H-PCP-J ...................... 53 - 2 53.2.2 Connecting to H-PCP-A or H-PCP-B.................. 53 - 6 53.2.3 Connecting to SRZ ......................
  • Page 734 54.2.2 System configuration for connecting to MicroLogix1000/1200/1400/1500 Series ....54 - 4 54.2.3 System configuration for connecting to Control/Compact/FlexLogix Series ....... 54 - 6 54.2.4 Connection diagram......................54 - 7 54.2.5 GOT side settings ......................54 - 10 54.2.6 PLC side setting........................ 54 - 11 54.3 Ethernet Connection ........................
  • Page 735 56.6 Device Range that Can Be Set....................56 - 15 57. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 57.1 Connectable Model List ......................... 57 - 1 57.2 System Configuration ........................57 - 1 57.2.1 Connecting to Flexi Soft ..................... 57 - 1 57.3 GOT Side Settings.........................
  • Page 736 61.4.4 M devices.......................... 61 - 12 61.4.5 SD devices........................61 - 13 61.4.6 SM devices ........................61 - 16 61.5 Message Formats ........................61 - 18 61.5.1 Data format type and application ..................61 - 18 61.5.2 List of commands......................61 - 19 61.5.3 Formats 1, 2 (GOT-A900 Series microcomputer connection) ..........
  • Page 737 63.2 System Configuration ........................63 - 1 63.2.1 Connecting to MODBUS equipment ................... 63 - 1 63.3 Connection Diagram ........................63 - 3 63.3.1 RS-232 cable ........................63 - 3 63.3.2 RS-422/485 cable ....................... 63 - 4 63.4 GOT Side Settings......................... 63 - 6 63.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)..........
  • Page 738 A - 32...
  • Page 739: Manuals

    MANUALS The following table lists the manual relevant to this product. Refer to each manual for any purpose. Manual Number Manual Name Packaging (Model code) GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product SH-080866ENG GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Stored in CD-ROM (1D7MB9) SH-080867ENG...
  • Page 740: Abbreviations And Generic Terms

    Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157, GT156, GT155 GT1455-Q Abbreviation of GT1455-QTBDE, GT1455-QTBD GT145 GT1450-Q Abbreviation of GT1450-QMBDE, GT1450-QMBD, GT1450-QLBDE, GT1450-QLBD GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455-Q, GT1450-Q GT1275 GT1275-V Abbreviation of GT1275-VNBA, GT1275-VNBD GT1265 GT1265-V Abbreviation of GT1265-VNBA, GT1265-VNBD...
  • Page 741 GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z Interface converter unit GT15-75IF900 Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M Connection Conversion Adapter GT10-9PT5S RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set  Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description...
  • Page 742 GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO, Protective cover for oil GT16-50PCO, GT10-40PCO, GT10-30PCO, GT10-20PCO USB environmental protection cover GT16-UCOV, GT16-50UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT14-50UCOV, GT11-50UCOV Stand GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96, Attachment GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85...
  • Page 743  Software Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SWDNC-GTWK3-E and SWDNC-GTWK3-EA GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series...
  • Page 744  Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description Abbreviation of IAI Corporation AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (former Yamatake Corporation) OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation SHINKO...
  • Page 745: How To Read This Manual

    HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL  Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual. Following GOT is shown. Shows GT14 Handy. Connection cable Number of Connector Total connectable External cable RS-422 connector Communic conversion box model distance Model name Model name...
  • Page 746 System Configuration Examples System Configuration Examples in each chapter. (When connecting the PLC [MELSEC-Q] and GT14 Handy, with RS-422 cable) 1) Connect the RS-422 conversion cable[FA-CNV2405CBL]to the [MELSEC-Q]. 2) [GT14 Handy] and Connector conversion box [GT11H-CNB-37S] are Indicates the commercially available connected with External cable [GT11H-C100-37P].
  • Page 747 CONNECTIONS TO NON- MITSUBISHI PRODUCTS 32. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER ..32 - 1 33. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC ....33 - 1 CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER .
  • Page 749: Connectable Model List

    32. CONNECTION TO IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 32.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series name Model Clock Refer to type XSEL-J XSEL-K XSEL-KE XSEL-KT XSEL-KET XSEL-P X-SEL XSEL-Q XSEL-JX RS-232 32.2.1 XSEL-KX XSEL-KTX XSEL-PX XSEL-QX SSEL SSEL ASEL...
  • Page 750: System Configuration

    32.2 System Configuration 32.2.1 Connecting to X-SEL, SSEL, ASEL, PSEL Communication driver IAI X-SEL (1) When using the connector conversion box X-SEL Connector Connector SSEL conversion conversion ASEL cable PSEL Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Connector Cable model External cable...
  • Page 751 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) X-SEL SSEL ASEL PSEL External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Series name Communication type GT11H-C60(3m) X-SEL RS-232 (Teaching connector) RS232 connection diagram 3) 1 GOT for 1 Controller GT11H-C60(3m) X-SEL RS-232...
  • Page 752: Connecting To Pcon, Acon, Scon, Erc2

    32.2.2 Connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 Communication driver IAI ROBO CYLINDER  When connecting to one controller (RS-232) (1) PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 (SIO specifications), and ERC2 (NP/PN specifications) (a) When using the connector conversion box PCON Connector RS232C Communication ACON conversion...
  • Page 753 (c) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) PCON Communication RS232C ACON SCON conversion unit cable ERC2 External cable Controller Number of External device communication RS232 conversion Total External cable connectable cable adapter model distance Series name equipment GT11H-C30(3m) PCON GT11H-C60(6m) ACON CB-RCA-SIO050(5m) RCB-CV-MW(0.3m)
  • Page 754 (2) ERC2 (NP/PN specifications) only (a) When using the connector conversion box ERC2 Connection cable 1) Connector Terminal conversion converter block Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) External cable Connection Connection Connection Controller SIO controller cable 2) cable 3) cable 1) Connector Number of Terminal...
  • Page 755 (b) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) ERC2 Connection cable 1) Terminal converter block Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) External cable Connection cable Connection Connection Controller SIO controller cable 2) cable 3) Number of Max. Total Cable model Terminal block External cable connectable Connection...
  • Page 756 (c) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) ERC2 Connection cable 1) Terminal converter block Connection cable 2) External cable Connection cable Controller Connection cable 2) SIO controller Number of Max. Total Terminal block External cable connectable distance model distance Communic Connection diagram Communic equipment...
  • Page 757  When connecting to multiple controllers (via an SIO converter) (3) PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 (SIO specifications), and ERC2 (NP/PN specifications) (a) When using the connector conversion box PCON PCON ACON ACON SCON SCON ERC2 ERC2 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connector Junction Junction...
  • Page 758 Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics. Connect the controller to the SIO converter directly with the CB-RCB-CTL002 cable. The distance from the controller to the SIO converter The distance from the SIO converter to the GT14 Handy Use ERC2------SE--. Use the following models.
  • Page 759 (b) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) PCON PCON ACON ACON SCON SCON ERC2 ERC2 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Junction Junction converter box 4D box 4D Terminating Connection Connection Connection External cable cable 2) cable 3) cable 4) cable Terminal Connection...
  • Page 760 Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics. Connect the controller to the SIO converter directly with the CB-RCB-CTL002 cable. The distance from the controller to the SIO converter The distance from the SIO converter to the GT14 Handy Use ERC2------SE--. Use the following models.
  • Page 761 (c) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) PCON PCON ACON ACON SCON SCON ERC2 ERC2 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Junction Junction converter box 4D box 4D Terminating External Connection Connection cable cable cable 2) cable 3) Terminal Four-way Connection Connection Controller...
  • Page 762 Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics. Connect the controller to the SIO converter directly with the CB-RCB-CTL002 cable. The distance from the controller to the SIO converter The distance from the SIO converter to the GT14 Handy Use ERC2------SE--. Use the following models.
  • Page 763 (4) ERC2 (NP/PN specifications) only (a) When using the connector conversion box ERC2 ERC2 ERC2 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connector Terminal Terminal Terminal conversion converter block block block Connection cable 3) External cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable Connection Connection...
  • Page 764 (b) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) ERC2 ERC2 ERC2 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Terminal Terminal Terminal converter block block block Connection cable 3) External cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable Connection Connection cable Controller SIO controller cable 2) Number of...
  • Page 765 (c) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) ERC2 ERC2 ERC2 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Terminal Terminal Terminal converter block block block External cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable Connection cable Controller SIO controller Number of Max.
  • Page 766: Connection Diagram

    32.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 3) GOT and the PLC. External cable IAI robot controller side 32.3.1 RS-232 cable GT11H-C side FG(Shield) Shield  Connection diagram SD(TXD) W/R (A) RS232 connection diagram 1) ER(DTR) W/BK (A) Connector conversion...
  • Page 767 RS232 connection diagram 6) RS232 connection diagram 9) External cable External cable IAI robot controller side SIO converter side GT11H-C side GT11H-C side FG(Shield) FG(Shield) Shield Shield SD(TXD) SD(TXD) SD(TXD) W/R (A) W/R (A) W/BK (A) ER(DTR) RD(RXD) ER(DTR) W/BK (A) RD(RXD) GY/R (A) RD(RXD)
  • Page 768  Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 3m or less. (2) Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector, refer to the following. 6.6 Connector Conversion Box (3) External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable side, refer to the following.
  • Page 769: Rs-422 Cable

    32.3.2 RS-422 cable RS422/485 connection diagram 4) Junction box 4D side Terminal block (User preparing) E-CON Connector (Plug)  Connection diagram Model name : -1473562-4 Signal name RS422 connection diagram 1) SGA(Orange : Red1) Junction box 4D side Terminating SGB(Orange : Black1) E-CON connector (plug) Terminating resistor...
  • Page 770  Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length (a) When the communication route between the GOT and the robot controller does not go through the SIO converter The distance from the robot controller to the Handy GOT converter must be 13m or less. (b) When the communication route between the GOT and the robot controller goes through the SIO converter...
  • Page 771: Got Side Settings

    32.4 GOT Side Settings 32.4.1 Setting communication interface 32.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT. (1) IAI X-SEL Controller Item Description Range 9600bps, Set this item when change the transmission 19200bps, Transmission...
  • Page 772 (2) IAI ROBO CYLINDER Item Description Range 9600bps, Set this item when change the transmission 19200bps, Transmission speed used for communication with the 38400bps, Speed connected equipment. 57600bps, (Default: 38400bps) 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected Data Bit 7bit, 8bit equipment.
  • Page 773: Robot Controller Side Setting

    32.5 Robot Controller Side Setting  POINT POINT POINT Mode switch (1) X-SEL K type IAI Robot Controller (a) When setting the mode switch to "MANU" For details of IAI Robot Controller, refer to the following Connect the GOT to the following teaching manual.
  • Page 774: Connecting To Ssel, Asel, Psel

    32.5.3 Connecting to PCON, ACON, 32.5.2 Connecting to SSEL, ASEL, SCON PSEL  Axis number setting and mode switching  Parameter setting For controllers without the following switches, set from Enter the following parameters using peripheral the setting tool (PC software). software.
  • Page 775: Station Number Setting

    32.5.5 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive. Station Station Station Station Station...
  • Page 776: Device Range That Can Be Set

    32.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non- Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 32.7 Precautions...
  • Page 777: Connectable Model List

    33. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 33.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. The CQM1-CPU11 is unable to communicate with GOT since the CQM1-CPU11 has no RS-232C interface. Communi The C200HE-CPU11 does not support communication Series Model Clock cation Refer to...
  • Page 778: Serial Connection

    33.2 Serial Connection 33.2.1 System configuration for connecting to CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C or CQM1 Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC  When connecting to PLC or RS-232C (1) When using the connector conversion box CPM1,CPM1A Connector RS232C CPM2A,CPM2C conversion adapter CQM1 External cable Connection cable Connection cable...
  • Page 779 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) CPM1,CPM1A RS232C CPM2A,CPM2C adapter CQM1 External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type RS-232C adapter GT11H-C30(3m) CPM2A GT11H-C60(6m) RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC CQM1 RS232 connection diagram 3) CPM1 GT11H-C30(3m) CPM1A...
  • Page 780  When connecting to OMRON connection cable (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector OMRON CPM1A conversion connection cable External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total OMRON Commun External cable connectable Cable model conversion box model distance connection Model...
  • Page 781: System Configuration For Connecting To Cqm1H

    33.2.2 System configuration for connecting to CQM1H Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC  When connecting to PLC or serial communication board (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector Serial conversion CQM1H communication board Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Serial...
  • Page 782 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Serial CQM1H communication board External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Serial communication board GT11H-C30 (3m) GT11H-C60 (6m) RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS232 connection diagram 3) GT11H-C30 (3m) GT11H-C60 (6m) RS-232...
  • Page 783 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) OMRON CQM1H connection cable External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type OMRON connection cable GT11H-C30 (3m) CQM 1H CQM1-CIF02 RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS232 connection diagram 3) Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation.
  • Page 784: System Configuration For Connecting To Cj1H, Cj1G, Cj1M, Cj2H, Or Cj2M

    33.2.3 System configuration for connecting to CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2H, or CJ2M Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC (1) When using the connector conversion box Serial CJ1H,CJ1G Connector communication CJ1M,CJ2H conversion module CJ2M /RS-422A converter Connection cable External cable Connection cable Serial Number of Connector Total...
  • Page 785 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Serial CJ1H,CJ1G communication CJ1M,CJ2H module CJ2M /RS-422A converter Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Total Serial communication module/ External cable connectable Communication Cable model model distance RS-422A converter/Option Model equipment type Connection diagram number board 1 GOT for1...
  • Page 786 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Serial CJ1H,CJ1G communication CJ1M,CJ2H module CJ2M /RS-422A converter External cable Number of Total External cable connectable Serial communication module/RS- Communication model distance Model equipment type 422A converter/Option board GT11H-C30 (3m) GT11H-C60 (6m) CJ1H, RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC CJ1G,...
  • Page 787: System Configuration For Connecting To Cp1H, Cp1L, Or Cp1E

    33.2.4 System configuration for connecting to CP1H, CP1L, or CP1E Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC  When connecting a PLC or option board (1) When using the connector conversion box CP1H Connector CP1L Option board conversion CP1E Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector...
  • Page 788 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) CP1H CP1L Option board CP1E External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Option board GT11H-C30 (3m) GT11H-C60 (6m) CP1E RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS232 connection diagram 3) GT11H-C30 (3m) 1 GOT for 1 RS-232C option GT11H-C60 (6m)
  • Page 789 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Serial CJ Unit CP1H communication Adapter module Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Total Serial External cable connectable CJ unit Communicat Cable model model distance communication Model equipment ion type Connection diagram number adapter module CJ1W-SCU21...
  • Page 790: Or C200He

    33.2.5 System configuration for connecting to C200HS, C200H, C200HX, C200HG, or C200HE Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC  When connecting to PLC or rack type host link unit (1) When using the connector conversion box C200HS,C200H, Connector Rack type C200HX,C200HG, conversion host link unit C200HE External cable...
  • Page 791 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) C200HS,C200H, Rack type C200HX,C200HG, host link unit C200HE External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Rack type host link unit GT11H-C30 (3m) C200HX GT11H-C60 (6m) C200HG RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC C200HE...
  • Page 792 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) C200HX Communication C200HG board C200HE External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Total External cable connectable Communication Communication Cable model model distance Model equipment type Connection diagram number board C200HW-COM02 1 GOT for 1 C200HW-COM05 RS-232 GT11H-C30-37P(3m)
  • Page 793: System Configuration For Connecting To Cs1H, Cs1G, Or Cs1D

    33.2.6 System configuration for connecting to CS1H, CS1G, or CS1D Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC  When connecting to a PLC or a serial communication module (1) When using the connector conversion box Serial CS1H Connector communication CS1G conversion module CS1D /RS-422A converter Connection cable External cable...
  • Page 794 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Serial CS1H communication CS1G module CS1D /RS-422A converter External cable Total Number of connectable External cable Serial communication module/RS-422A Communication model distance equipment Model type converter GT11H-C30 (3m) GT11H-C60 (6m) RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS232 connection diagram 3) GT11H-C30 (3m) CS1H...
  • Page 795 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Serial CS1H communication CS1G board CS1D External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Total External cable connectable Serial communication Communication Cable model model distance Model equipment type Connection diagram number board CS1W-SCB21 CS1W-SCB41 RS-232 GT11H-C30-37P(3m)
  • Page 796: System Configuration For Connecting To C1000H Or C2000H

    33.2.7 System configuration for connecting to C1000H or C2000H Communication driver OMRON SYSMAC (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector Rack type C1000H conversion host link unit C2000H Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Commun External cable connectable Rack type host...
  • Page 797: System Configuration For Connecting To Cv500, Cv1000, Cv2000, Or Cvm1

    (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Rack type C1000H host link unit C2000H External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Rack type host link unit GT11H-C30 (3m) GT11H-C60 (6m) RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 9) C1000H 1 GOT for 1 port of a C500-LK201-V1...
  • Page 798 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 External cable Connection cable Connection cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number RS-232 GT11H-C30-37P(3m) RS232 connection diagram 2) CV500 CV1000 1 GOT for 1 PLC...
  • Page 799: Connection Diagram

    33.2.9 Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 4) Connector conversion OMRON PLC side side The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. RD(RXD)  RS-232 cable SD(TXD) (1) Connection diagram ER(DTR) RS232 connection diagram 1) Connector conversion OMRON PLC side side DR(DSR)
  • Page 800 RS232 connection diagram 7) (2) Precautions when preparing a cable Connector conversion (a) Cable length OMRON PLC side side The total distance (between GOT and controllers) of RS-232 cable must be 6m or less. (b) Connector conversion box side connector RD(RXD) For the connector conversion box side connector, SD(TXD)
  • Page 801 RS422 connection diagram 3)  External cable RS-422 cable OMRON PLC side GT11H-C side FG(Shield) Shield POINT POINT POINT W/R (A) Differences in polarity between GOT and OMRON W/BK (A) PLCs GY/R (A) The polarity of poles A and B in signal names is GY/BK (A) reversed between GOT and OMRON PLCs.
  • Page 802 RS422 connection diagram 9) RS422 connection diagram 6) External cable External cable OMRON PLC side OMRON PLC side GT11H-C side GT11H-C side FG(Shield) Shield FG(Shield) Shield W/R (A) W/R (A) W/BK (A) W/BK (A) GY/R (A) GY/R (A) GY/BK (A) GY/BK (A) O/R (A) O/R (A)
  • Page 803 RS422 connection diagram 12) External cable OMRON PLC side GT11H-C side FG(Shield) Shield RDB+ W/R (A) RDA- W/BK (A) GY/R (A) GY/BK (A) SDB+ O/R (A) SDA- O/BK (A) Y/R (A) Y/BK (A) PK/R (A) (2) Precautions when preparing a cable (a) Cable length The total distance (between GOT and controllers) of RS-422 cable must be 13m or less.
  • Page 804: Got Side Settings

    33.2.10 GOT side settings  Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.  Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Item Description Range 4800bps, Set the channel of the equipment connected to the Set this item when change the 9600bps, GOT.
  • Page 805: Plc Side Setting

    33.2.11 PLC side setting 33.2.12 Connecting to CPM2A, CQM1, CQM1H, C200Hα or RS-232C adapter POINT POINT POINT  Device settings OMRON PLC Write the following set values to devices of each PLC For details of OMRON PLCs, refer to the following CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or manual.
  • Page 806: Connecting To Cj1, Cj2, Cs1, Cp1H, Cp1L, Or Cp1E

    33.2.13 Connecting to CJ1, CJ2, CS1, (2) Setting on the CS1 CP1H, CP1L, or CP1E ERR/ALM PRPHL/COMM  Setting DIP switches DIP switch Set the DIP switches. (inside battery compartment) OPEN MCPWR BUSY (1) Setting on the CJ1, CJ2 OPEN PERIPHERAL DIP switch (inside battery compartment)
  • Page 807: Connecting To Cv500/Cv1000/Cv2000 Or Cvm1

    33.2.14 Connecting to CV500/CV1000/  Setting PLC system settings CV2000 or CVM1 (1) CJ1, CJ2, CS1 Make the PLC system settings.  Setting DIP switches Channel Item Set value Set the DIP switches. : Arbitary settings Arbitrary settings ON/OFF (fixed) 8 to 11 Serial communication mode : Upper link (fixed)
  • Page 808: Connecting To Connection Cable

    33.2.15 Connecting to connection 33.2.16 Connecting to rack type host cable link unit   Device settings Switch setting on C200H-LK201-V1 Write the following set values to devices of each PLC Set the switches accordingly. CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or Front Rear DM monitor.
  • Page 809 (3) Setting command level/parity/transmission code (2) Setting transmission speed (SW3) (SW4) Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. Contents of setting Set value Setting Setting Comman Transmissi 4800bps Parity d level on code 9600bps Levels 1, ASCII 7 19200bps 2 and 3 Even bits...
  • Page 810  (6) Setting SW1 (Station No., Run/Stop) Switch setting on C500-LK201-V1 Set the switches accordingly. Switch No. Setting Description Front Rear In operation Receiving Transmitting Set the station No. within the Transmission error range of 00 to 31. For details, refer to the Mode selection Host link following manual.
  • Page 811: Connecting To Serial Communication Unit

    33.2.17 Connecting to serial 33.2.18 Connecting to communication communication unit board, serial communication board (CQM1-SCB41)  Device settings  Write the following set values to devices of each PLC Device settings CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or Write the following set values to devices of each PLC DM monitor.
  • Page 812: Connecting To Serial Communication Board (Cs1W-Scb21(-V1), Cs1W-Scb41(-V1))

    33.2.19 Connecting to serial  Setting DIP switches (C200HW-COM3 and communication board (CS1W- C200HW-COM6 only) SCB21(-V1), CS1W-SCB41(- Set the DIP switches when performing the RS-422 V1)) communications on the C200HW-COM3 and C200HW- COM6. C200HW-COM3 C200HW-COM6  Device settings Write the following set values to devices of each PLC CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or COMB COMA...
  • Page 813: Connecting To Rs-422A/485 Option Board

    33.2.20 Connecting to RS-422A/485  Setting the DIP switches (CS1W-SCB41(-V1) Option board only) Set the DIP switches when performing the RS-422  Setting DIP switches communications on the CS1W-SCB41(-V1). Set the DIP switches DIP Switches for Operation Settings COMM1 COMM2 COMM RDA- RDB+ SDA- SDB+ FG TERM...
  • Page 814: Ethernet Connection

    33.3 Ethernet Connection 33.3.1 System configuration Communication driver Ethernet( ), Gateway OMRON Connector CS1H,CS1G,CS1D, Ethernet conversion CJ1H,CJ1M,CJ1G, module CJ2H,CJ2M Connection cable External cable Connection cable Maximum Number of Connector segment connectable External cable Ethernet conversion box model Series Cable model length equipment module...
  • Page 815 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. If it is connected to devices other than the GOT using the connection, the number of connectable GOTs decreases. For details, refer to the OMRON PLC user's manual. There is no restriction for the number of GOTs.
  • Page 816: Got Side Settings

    33.3.2 GOT side settings  Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.  Setting communication interface Item Description Range (Communication settings) Set the network No. of the GOT. GOT NET No. 1 to 127 Set the channel of the connected equipment. (Default: 1) Set the station No.
  • Page 817  Ethernet setting Item Description Set value The host is displayed. (The host is Host indicated with an asterisk (*).) Set the network No. of the connected N/W No. Ethernet module. 1 to 127 (Default: blank) Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module.
  • Page 818: Plc Side Setting

    33.3.3 PLC side setting POINT POINT POINT OMRON PLC For the communication between OMRON PLC and GOT, use the FINS communication. For the FINS communication, the node must be specified according to the realm of FINS. However, for the Ethernet network, the data transfer according to the IP address is required. •...
  • Page 819: Precautions

    • Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT 33.4 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual(Fundamentals)
  • Page 820 33 - 44 33. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 33.4 Device Range that Can Be Set...
  • Page 821 34. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 34.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model Communication type Refer to E5AN, E5EN THERMAC NEO RS-232 34.2.1 E5CN, E5GN INPANEL NEO E5ZN RS-232 34.2.2 34 - 1 34. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 34.1 Connectable Model List...
  • Page 822 34.2 System Configuration 34.2.1 Connecting to the THERMAC NEO series  When connecting to one temperature controller (1) When using the connector conversion box Communication driver Connector E5AN conversion OMRON E5EN THERMAC/INPANEL NEO Connection cable External cable Temperature controller Connection cable Connector Total Number of connectable...
  • Page 823  When connecting to multiple temperature controllers (via an interface converter) (1) When using the connector conversion box Communication driver OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO Connector E5AN,E5EN, E5AN,E5EN, Interface conversion converter E5CN,E5GN E5CN,E5GN Connection cable 2) External cable Connection cable 1) Temperature Connection Connection cable 1) Interface converter...
  • Page 824 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) E5AN,E5EN, E5AN,E5EN, Interface E5CN,E5GN E5CN,E5GN converter External cable Connection cable 1) Temperature Connection cable 1) Interface converter Number of Total controller External cable connectable distance model Cable model Max. Communication equipment Model Model Connection diagram number distance type...
  • Page 825: Connecting To The Inpanel Neo

    34.2.2 Connecting to the INPANEL NEO Communication driver OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector Interface conversion E5ZN E5ZN converter External cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) Temperature Connection Connection cable 1) Interface converter controller cable 2) Number of Total...
  • Page 826 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Interface E5ZN E5ZN converter External cable Connection cable 1) Temperature Connection cable 1) Interface converter Number of Total controller External cable connectable distance model Cable model Max. Communication equipment Model Model Connection diagram number distance type GT11H-C30 (3m)
  • Page 827 34.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 4) GOT and the PLC. Connector conversion Interface converter box side (K3SC-10) 34.3.1 RS-232 cable  Connection diagram RD(RXD) RS232 connection diagram 1) SD(TXD) Connector conversion OMRON temperature ER(DTR) box side...
  • Page 828  Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length The total distance (between GOT and controllers) of RS-232 cable must be 6m or less. (2) Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector, refer to the following. 6.6 Connector Conversion Box (3) External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external cable...
  • Page 829 34.3.2 RS-485 cable  Connection diagram RS485 connection diagram 1) Terminating resistor(120 1/2W) Interface converter Temperature Temperature (K3SC-10) controller side controller side A(-) A(-) A(-) B(+) B(+) B(+) Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following. Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminating resistors.
  • Page 830 34.4 GOT Side Settings 34.4.1 Setting communication interface 34.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT. Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps, transmission speed used for 19200bps,...
  • Page 831: Connecting To E5An, E5En, E5Cn, E5Gn

    34.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 34.5.3 Connecting to interface POINT POINT POINT converter (K3SC-10) OMRON temperature controller  For details of OMRON temperature controller, refer to Communication settings the following manual. Make the communication settings by operating the DIP User's Manual of the OMRON temperature switch of the temperature controller.
  • Page 832 34.5.4 Station number setting (2) Settings of data length, parity bit, stop bit, master/ slave device and echo back Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order.
  • Page 833: Precautions

    34.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual(Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 34.7 Precautions...
  • Page 834 34 - 14 34. CONNECTION TO OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 34.7 Precautions...
  • Page 835: Connectable Model List

    35. CONNECTION TO KEYENCE PLC 35.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Model Clock Communication type Refer to RS-232 RS-422 35.2.1 KV-5500 KV-5000 RS-485 Ethernet 35.3.1 RS-232 RS-422 35.2.2 KV-3000 RS-485 Ethernet 35.3.1 RS-232 RS-422 35.2.3 KV-1000 RS-485 Ethernet...
  • Page 836: Serial Connection

    35.2 Serial Connection 35.2.1 System configuration for connecting KV-5500,KV-5000 Communication driver KEYENCE KV-700/1000 (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector Multi- KV-5500 conversion communication KV-5000 unit Connection cable External cable Connection cable Total Number of Connector Multi- External cable distanc connectable Communication...
  • Page 837 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Multi- KV-5500 communication KV-5000 unit External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Total External cable connectable Multi-communication Communication Cable model model distance Model equipment type Connection diagram number unit KV-L20V RS-232 GT11H-C30-37P(3m) RS232 connection diagram 5) (port 1) 1 GOT for 1...
  • Page 838: Connecting To Kv-3000

    35.2.2 Connecting to KV-3000 Communication driver KEYENCE KV-700/1000  When connecting to a PLC (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector KV-3000 conversion External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Conversion Communication Cable model conversion box model distance...
  • Page 839  When connecting to multi-communication unit (1) When using the connector conversion box Multi- Connector KV-3000 communication conversion unit External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Multi- Connector Total Commun External cable connectable Cable model conversion box model distance communication Model ication...
  • Page 840 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Multi- KV-3000 communication unit External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Multi-communication unit GT11H-C30(3m) KV-L20V GT11H-C60(6m) RS-232 (port 1) RS232 connection diagram 6) GT11H-C30(3m) GT11H-C60(6m) RS-232 1 GOT for 1 multi- KV-3000 communication unit...
  • Page 841: Connecting To Kv-1000

    35.2.3 Connecting to KV-1000 Communication driver KEYENCE KV-700/1000  When connecting to a PLC (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector KV-1000 conversion Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Conversion Communication Cable model conversion box model distance...
  • Page 842  When connecting to multi-communication unit (1) When using the connector conversion box Multi- Connector KV-1000 communication conversion unit External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Multi- Commu External cable connectable Cable model conversion box model distance communication Model nication...
  • Page 843 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Multi- KV-1000 communication unit External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Multi-communication unit GT11H-C30(3m) KV-L20R, GT11H-C60(6m) KV-L20V RS-232 (port 1) RS232 connection diagram 6) GT11H-C30(3m) GT11H-C60(6m) RS-232 1 GOT for 1 multi- KV-1000...
  • Page 844: Connecting To Kv-700

    35.2.4 Connecting to KV-700 Communication driver KEYENCE KV-700/1000  When connecting to a PLC (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector KV-700 conversion External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Cable model External cable connectable Conversion Communication conversion box model...
  • Page 845  When connecting to multi-communication unit (1) When using the connector conversion box Multi- Connector KV-700 communication conversion unit External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Multi- Connector Total Commu External cable connectable Cable model conversion box model distance communication Model nication...
  • Page 846 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Multi- KV-700 communication unit External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Total External cable connectable Multi-communication Communication Cable model model distance Model equipment type Connection diagram number unit KV-L20R, KV-L20, RS-232 GT11H-C30-37P(3m) RS232 connection diagram 5) KV-L20V (port 1)
  • Page 847: Connection Diagram

    35.2.5 Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 4) KEYENCE PLC side Connector conversion (D-Sub 9-pin) side The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. RD(RXD)  RS-232 cable SD(TXD) ER(DTR) (1) Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1) KEYENCE PLC side Connector conversion DR(DSR)
  • Page 848 RS232 connection diagram 7) (2) Precautions when preparing a cable KEYENCE PLC side Connector conversion (a) Cable length (terminal block) side The total distance (between the GOT and a controller) of RS-232 cable must be 6m or less. (b) Connector conversion box side connector RD(RXD) For the connector conversion box side connector, SD(TXD)
  • Page 849  (2) Precautions when preparing a cable RS-422 cable (a) Cable length (1) Connection diagram The total distance (between GOT and controllers) RS422 connection diagram 1) of RS-422 cable must be 13m or less. KEYENCE PLC side Connector conversion (b) Connector conversion box side connector (terminal block) side For the connector conversion box side connector,...
  • Page 850: Got Side Settings

    35.2.6 GOT side settings  Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.  Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps, Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT. transmission speed used for 19200bps, Transmission...
  • Page 851: Plc Side Setting

    35.2.7 PLC side setting  Connecting to KV-L20R, KV-L20, or KV-L20V (1) Communication settings POINT POINT POINT Item Set value Communication mode KV mode (Upper link) KEYENCE PLC 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, *1*2 Transmission speed For details of KEYENCE PLC, refer to the following 57600bps, 115200bps manual.
  • Page 852 • Terminator setting switch Set when carrying out RS-422 communication. Setting When multi- When multi- communication unit communication unit is a terminal is not a terminal (b) When using KV-L20V Terminator setting switch Port 1 (RS232) Port 2 (RS232/RS422/RS485) • Terminator setting switch Set when carrying out RS-422 communication.
  • Page 853: Ethernet Connection

    35.3 Ethernet Connection 35.3.1 System configuration for connecting to KV-700/1000/3000/5000/5500 Communication driver MODBUS/RTU Connector Ethernet conversion module Connection cable External cable Connection cable Maximum Connector Number of connectable segment External cable Ethernet conversion box model equipment Series Cable model length module GT14H-C30-42P (3m) When PLC:GOT is N:1...
  • Page 854: Got Side Settings

    35.3.2 GOT side settings  Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.  Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Item Description Range Set the network No. of the GOT. Set the channel of the connected equipment. GOT NET No. 1 to 239 (Default: 1) Set the station No.
  • Page 855: Plc Side Setting

    35.3.3 PLC side setting  Ethernet setting POINT POINT POINT KEYENCE PLC For details of KEYENCE PLC, refer to the following manual. KEYENCE PLC user's Manual  Setting of KV-LE21V/LE20V Item Description Set value Set the IP address and port No. by the unit editor of KV The host is displayed.
  • Page 856: Device Range That Can Be Set

    35.4 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 35 - 22 35.
  • Page 857: Connectable Model List

    36. CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 36.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model Refer to Clock type SU-5E RS-232 RS-422 SU-6B KOSTAC SU Series 36.2.1 SU-5M RS-232 RS-422 SU-6M D0-05AA D0-05AD D0-05AR D0-05DA RS-232 DirectLOGIC 05 Series 36.2.2...
  • Page 858: System Configuration

    36.2 System Configuration 36.2.1 Connecting to SU-5E, SU-6B, SU-5M, or SU-6M Communication driver KOYO KOSTAC/DL  When connecting to one PLC (1) When using the connector conversion box Data Connector SU-5E/6B Communications conversion SU-5M/6M Module Connection cable External cable Connection cable Total Number of Connector...
  • Page 859 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Data SU-5E/6B Communications SU-5M/6M Module External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Total Data Communi External cable connectable Cable model model distance communications Model cation equipment Connection diagram number type module SU-5E/6B (general communication port) RS232 connection RS-232...
  • Page 860 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Data SU-5E/6B Communications SU-5M/6M Module External cable Total Number of connectable Data External cable Communication communications model distance equipment Model type module SU-5E/6B GT11H-C30(3m) (general communication port) GT11H-C60(6m) RS-232 SU-5M/6M RS232 connection diagram 3) (general communication port 1) SU-5E/6B GT11H-C30(3m)
  • Page 861  When connecting to multiple PLCs Communication driver KOYO KOSTAC/DL (1) When using the connector conversion box Data Data Connector SU-5E/6B SU-5E/6B Communications Communications conversion SU-5M/6B SU-5M/6B Module Module External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Data Commun Cable model External cable...
  • Page 862 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Data Data SU-5E/6B SU-5E/6B Communications Communications SU-5M/6B SU-5M/6B Module Module External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Total Data External cable connectable Communication Cable model model distance communications Model equipment type Connection diagram number module SU-5E/6B SU-5M/6M...
  • Page 863: Connecting To Directlogic 05 Or Directlogic 06 Series

    36.2.2 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 or DirectLOGIC 06 series  When connecting to one PLC Communication driver KOYO KOSTAC/DL (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector DirectLOGIC 05 D0-DCM conversion DirectLOGIC 06 Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Serial data...
  • Page 864 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) DirectLOGIC 05 D0-DCM DirectLOGIC 06 Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Total Serial data Commu External cable connectable Cable model communications model distance Model nication equipment Connection diagram number type module RS-232 GT11H-C30-37P(3m) RS232 connection diagram 5)
  • Page 865  When connecting to multiple PLCs Communication driver KOYO KOSTAC/DL (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector DirectLOGIC 05 DirectLOGIC 05 D0-DCM D0-DCM conversion DirectLOGIC 06 DirectLOGIC 06 External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Serial Commun Cable model External cable...
  • Page 866 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) DirectLOGIC 05 DirectLOGIC 05 D0-DCM D0-DCM DirectLOGIC 06 DirectLOGIC 06 External cable Total Number of connectable External cable Serial communication Communication model distance equipment Model type module Direct LOGIC 06 GT11H-C30 (3m) (communication port 2) GT11H-C60 (6m) 90 PLCs for 1 GOT Direct...
  • Page 867: Connecting To D2-240, D2-250-1 Or D2-260

    36.2.3 Connecting to D2-240, D2-250-1 or D2-260  When connecting to one PLC Communication driver KOYO KOSTAC/DL (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector D2-240 D2-DCM conversion D2-250-1 D2-260 Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Data Cable model External cable...
  • Page 868 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) D2-240 D2-DCM D2-250-1 D2-260 Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Total Data Cable model External cable connectable Communication model distance communications Model Connection diagram equipment type number module D2-240 D2-250-1 RS232 connection RS-232 GT11H-C30-37P(3m) D2-260...
  • Page 869  When connecting to multiple PLCs Communication driver KOYO KOSTAC/DL (1) When using the connector conversion box D2-240 D2-240 Connector D2-250-1 D2-DCM D2-250-1 D2-DCM conversion D2-260 D2-260 External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Data Cable model External cable connectable Communic...
  • Page 870: Connecting To Pz

    (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) D2-240 D2-240 D2-250-1 D2-DCM D2-250-1 D2-DCM D2-260 D2-260 External cable Total Number of connectable External cable Data communications Communication model distance equipment Model type module GT11H-C30(3m) D2-250-1 GT11H-C60(6m) D2-260 RS-422 GT11H-C100(10m) (communication port 2) RS422 connection diagram 24) 90 PLCs for 1 GOT GT11H-C30(3m)
  • Page 871 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Total External cable connectable Communication Cable model model distance Model equipment type Connection diagram number RS-232 GT11H-C30-37P(3m) RS232 connection diagram 5) 1 PLC for 1 GT11H-C30-37P(3m) (general communication port 2) RS-422...
  • Page 872  When connecting to multiple PLCs Communication driver KOYO KOSTAC/DL (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector conversion External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Communication Cable model conversion box model distance Model equipment type Connection diagram number...
  • Page 873 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type GT11H-C30(3m) GT11H-C60(6m) RS-422 90 PLCs for 1 GOT GT11H-C100(10m) (general communication port 2) RS422 connection diagram 24) When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links. For details, refer to the following manual.
  • Page 874: Connection Diagram

    36.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 3) GOT and the PLC. External cable KOYO EI PLC side GT11H-C side 36.3.1 RS-232 cable FG(shield) Shield  Connection diagram RD(RXD) GY/R (A) RS232 connection diagram 1) SD(TXD) W/R (A) Connector conversion...
  • Page 875: Rs-422 Cable

    RS232 connection diagram 6) 36.3.2 RS-422 cable External cable KOYO EI PLC side GT11H-C side  Connection diagram FG(Shield) RS422 connection diagram 1) Shield Connector conversion RD(RXD) GY/R (A) KOYO EI PLC side box side SD(TXD) W/R (A) +TXD ER(DTR) W/BK (A) -TXD PK/R (A)
  • Page 876 RS422 connection diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 5) External cable External cable KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side GT11H-C side GT11H-C-37P side +TXD3 +TXD O/R (A) -TXD -TXD3 O/BK (A) +RXD3 +RXD W/R (A) -RXD -RXD3 W/BK (A) GY/R (A) 1 to 6 1 to 6...
  • Page 877 RS422 connection diagram 7) RS422 connection diagram 9) Connector conversion External cable KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side box side GT11H-C side +TXD +TXD O/R (A) -TXD -TXD O/BK (A) +RXD +RXD W/R (A) -RXD -RXD W/BK (A) GY/R (A) 1 to 6 1 to 6...
  • Page 878 RS422 connection diagram 11) RS422 connection diagram 12) External cable External cable KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side GT11H-C-37P side GT11H-C side +TXD3 +TXD3 O/R (A) -TXD3 -TXD3 O/BK (A) +RXD3 +RXD3 W/R (A) -RXD3 -RXD3 W/BK (A) GY/R (A) 2 to 5 GY/BK (A)
  • Page 879 RS422 connection diagram 14) External cable KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side GT11H-C-37P side +TXD +TXD -TXD -TXD +RXD +RXD -RXD -RXD 1 to 6 1 to 6 FG(Shield) -RTS -RTS +RTS +RTS 20 to 22 20 to 22 -CTS -CTS +CTS...
  • Page 880 RS422 connection diagram 16) Connector conversion KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side box side +TXD3 +TXD3 -TXD3 -TXD3 +RXD3 +RXD3 -RXD3 -RXD3 1 to 6 1 to 6 8 to 11 8 to 11 14 to 23 14 to 23 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.
  • Page 881 RS422 connection diagram 18) External cable KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side GT11H-C side +TXD3 +TXD3 O/R (A) -TXD3 -TXD3 O/BK (A) +RXD3 +RXD3 W/R (A) -RXD3 -RXD3 W/BK (A) GY/R (A) 1 to 6 1 to 6 GY/BK (A) 8 to 11 8 to 11...
  • Page 882 RS422 connection diagram 20) External cable KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side GT11H-C-37P side +TXD +TXD -TXD -TXD +RXD +RXD -RXD -RXD 1 to 6 1 to 6 +RTS +RTS -RTS -RTS 18 to 21 18 to 21 +RTS +RTS FG(Shield)
  • Page 883 RS422 connection diagram 22) Connector conversion KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side box side +TXD +TXD -TXD -TXD +RXD +RXD -RXD -RXD 2 to 5 2 to 5 +RTS +RTS -RTS -RTS +CTS +CTS -CTS -CTS Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 100 to 500Ω) to the PLC to be a terminal.
  • Page 884 RS422 connection diagram 24) External cable KOYO EI PLC side KOYO EI PLC side GT11H-C side +TXD3 +TXD3 O/R (A) -TXD3 -TXD3 O/BK (A) +RXD +RXD3 W/R (A) -RXD -RXD3 W/BK (A) GY/R (A) GY/BK (A) 2 to 5 2 to 5 Y/R (A) Y/BK (A) PK/R (A)
  • Page 885: Got Side Settings

    36.4 GOT Side Settings 36.4.1 Setting communication interface 36.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT. Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps, transmission speed used for 19200bps,...
  • Page 886: Plc Side Setting

    36.5 PLC Side Setting 36.5.1 Connecting to SU-5E/6B POINT POINT POINT  Communication settings KOYO EI PLC Make the following settings using the programmer For details of KOYO EI PLCs, refer to the following manuals. system parameter setting. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual Item Set value Station No.
  • Page 887: Connecting To Su-5M/6M

    36.5.2 Connecting to SU-5M/6M 36.5.4 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 205 series  Communication settings  Make the following settings using the programmer Communication settings system parameter setting. Make the following settings using the programmer system parameter setting. Item Set value Protocol Item Set value Response delay time...
  • Page 888: Connecting To U-01Dm

    36.5.6 Connecting to U-01DM  Setting switches Make the communication settings using each setting switch. (3) Communication and the DIP switch for a setup of a protocol (SW5) Front Back Switch No. Item Set value Address selection switch Peer to Peer Slave TOUT existence Enable...
  • Page 889: Connecting To D0-Dcm

    36.5.7 Connecting to D0-DCM 36.5.9 Station number setting  Communication settings Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. Write the following communication settings to the The station number can be set without regard to the cable specified register using the programmer. For details of connection order.
  • Page 890: Device Range That Can Be Set

    36.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 36 - 34 36.
  • Page 891: Connectable Model List

    37. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 37.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Model Model type Clock Refer to type PC3JG-P TIC-6088 PC3JG TIC-6125 RS-232 37.2.1 RS-422 PC3JD TIC-5642 PC3JD-C TIC-6029 TIC-5339 PC3J RS-232 37.2.2 RS-422 PC3JL TIC-5783 PC2J...
  • Page 892: System Configuration

    37.2 System Configuration 37.2.1 Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JG-P, PC3JD, or PC3JD-C  For the RS-422 connection Communication driver JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC (1) When using the connector conversion box PC3JG PC3JG Connector PC3JG-P PC3JG-P Link unit Link unit conversion PC3JD PC3JD PC3JD-C PC3JD-C External cable 2 P O R T - L I N K...
  • Page 893 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) PC3JG PC3JG PC3JG-P PC3JG-P Link unit Link unit PC3JD PC3JD PC3JD-C PC3JD-C 2 P O R T - L I N K 2 P O R T - L I N K TXDA TXDB TXDA TXDB...
  • Page 894 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) PC3JG PC3JG Link Link Interface PC3JG-P PC3JG-P PC3JD PC3JD unit unit converter PC3JD-C PC3JD-C Connection cable 2) External cable 2 P O R T - L I N K 2 P O R T - L I N K TXDA TXDB TXDA...
  • Page 895: Connecting To Pc3J Or Pc3Jl

    37.2.2 Connecting to PC3J or PC3JL  For the RS-422 connection Communication driver JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector PC3J PC3J Link unit Link unit conversion PC3JL PC3JL External cable Connection cable 2) 2 P O R T - L I N K 2 P O R T - L I N K P C 3 J - C P U P C 3 J - C P U...
  • Page 896 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) PC3J PC3J Link unit Link unit PC3JL PC3JL External cable 2 P O R T - L I N K 2 P O R T - L I N K P C 3 J - C P U P C 3 J - C P U TXDA TXDB...
  • Page 897 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) PC3J Link PC3J Link Interface PC3JL unit PC3JL unit converter External cable Connection cable 2) 2 P O R T - L I N K 2 P O R T - L I N K P C 3 J - C P U P C 3 J - C P U TXDA...
  • Page 898: Connecting To Pc2J, Pc2Js Or Pc2Jr

    37.2.3 Connecting to PC2J, PC2JS or PC2JR  For the RS-422 connection Communication driver JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC (1) When using the connector conversion box PC2J PC2J Connector PC2JS Link unit PC2JS Link unit conversion PC2JR PC2JR Connection cable 2) External cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
  • Page 899 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) PC2J PC2J PC2JS Link unit PC2JS Link unit PC2JR PC2JR External cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Number of Total External cable connectable distance Communication Cable model model Model Link unit equipment type Connection diagram number GT11H-C30(3m)
  • Page 900 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) PC2J PC2J Link Link PC2JS PC2JS unit unit PC2JR PC2JR Connection cable 2) External cable Connection cable 1) RS-232/RS-422 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Interface converter Number of Total External cable connectable distance Cable model model...
  • Page 901: Connecting To Pc2Jc, Pc216P Or Pc2J16Pr

    37.2.4 Connecting to PC2JC, PC216P or PC2J16PR  For the RS-422 connection Communication driver JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC (1) When using the connector conversion box PC2JC PC2JC Connector Link unit Link unit PC2J16P PC2J16P conversion PC2J16PR PC2J16PR External cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)
  • Page 902 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) PC2JC PC2JC Link unit Link unit PC2J16P PC2J16P PC2J16PR PC2J16PR External cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Number of Total External cable connectable distance Communicat Cable model model Model Link unit equipment ion type Connection diagram number GT11H-C30(3m)
  • Page 903 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) PC2JC PC2JC Link Link Interface PC2J16P PC2J16P unit unit converter PC2J16PR PC2J16PR External cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) RS-232/RS- Number of Total Communi Cable model Cable model 422 Interface External cable...
  • Page 904: Connection Diagram

    37.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 3) GOT and the PLC. JTEKT PLC side (RS-232/RS-422 External cable Interface converter) GT11H-C side 37.3.1 RS-232 cable FG(Shield) Shield SD(TXD) W/R (A)  Connection diagram ER(DTR) W/BK (A) RS232 connection diagram 1)
  • Page 905: Rs-422 Cable

    37.3.2 RS-422 cable RS422 connection diagram 3) Link unit Link unit RS-232/RS-422 side side interface converter  Connection diagram RD(+) RS422 connection diagram 1) (For PC3JG-P/PC3JG/PC3JD/PC3JD-C) RD(-) RS-232/RS-422 TD(+) interface converter PLC side PLC side TD(-) RD(+) RD(-) Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and terminals.
  • Page 906 RS422 connection diagram 6) RS422 connection diagram 9) External cable Link unit PLC side PLC side PLC side GT11H-C side side side L1S+ L1S+ L1S+ FG(Shield) Shield L1S- L1S- L1S- W/R (A) L1R+ L1R+ L1R+ L1R+ W/BK (A) L1R- L1R- L1R- L1R- GY/R (A)
  • Page 907: Got Side Settings

    37.4 GOT Side Settings 37.4.1 Setting communication interface 37.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT. Item Description Range 9600bps, Set this item when change the 19200bps, Transmission transmission speed used for...
  • Page 908: Plc Side Setting

    37.5 PLC Side Setting 37.5.2 Connecting to PC2JC POINT POINT POINT  Communication settings JTEKT PLC Make the communication settings using each setting For details of JTEKT PLCs, refer to the following manuals. switch. For the detail settings, refer to the following manual. JTEKT PLC user's manual JTEKT PLC user's manual Item...
  • Page 909: Connecting To Pc2J16P Or Pc2J16Pr

    37.5.3 Connecting to PC2J16P or 37.5.4 RS-232/RS-422 interface PC2J16PR converter setting   Communication settings Communication settings Make the communication settings using each setting Make the communication settings by the setting switch switch. of the RS-232/RS-422 interface converter. For the detail settings, refer to the following manual. Item Set value JTEKT PLC user's manual...
  • Page 910: Link Unit Setting

    37.5.5 Link unit setting (1) Setting of the station No. Set the station No. between 00 and 37 (Octal).  Communication settings Switch name Station number setting Make the communication settings using each setting Upper digit switch of the link unit. Lower digit For the detail settings, refer to the following manual.
  • Page 911: Device Range That Can Be Set

    37.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 37.7 Precautions...
  • Page 912 37 - 22 37. CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 37.7 Precautions...
  • Page 913: Connection To Sharp Plc

    38. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 38.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Model Clock Communication type Refer to JW-21CU RS-422 38.2.1 RS-232 JW-22CU RS-422 JW-31CUH RS-422 JW-32CUH 38.2.2 RS-232 RS-422 JW-33CUH JW-50CUH RS-422 JW-70CUH 38.2.3 RS-232 JW-100CUH RS-422 JW-100CU...
  • Page 914: System Configuration

    38.2 System Configuration 38.2.1 Connecting to JW-21CU or JW-22CU Communication driver SHARP JW (1) When using the connector conversion box JW-21CU Connector JW-22CU Link unit conversion JW-31CU Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Commu External cable connectable Cable model conversion box...
  • Page 915 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) JW-21CU JW-22CU Link unit JW-31CU External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Link unit GT11H-C30(3m) GT11H-C60(6m) RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 3) JW-22CU GT11H-C30(3m) GT11H-C60(6m) RS-422 GT11H-C100(10m) 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS422 connection diagram 3) GT11H-C30(3m)
  • Page 916: Connecting To Jw-31Cuh, Jw-32Cuh Or Jw-33Cuh

    38.2.2 Connecting to JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH or JW-33CUH Communication driver SHARP JW (1) When using the connector conversion box JW-31CUH Connector JW-32CUH Link unit conversion JW-33CUH External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Commu External cable connectable Cable model conversion box model distance...
  • Page 917 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) JW-31CUH JW-32CUH Link unit JW-33CUH External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Link unit GT11H-C30(3m) GT11H-C60(6m) RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 6) JW-32CUH GT11H-C30(3m) JW-33CUH GT11H-C60(6m) RS-422 GT11H-C100(10m) 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS422 connection diagram 6)
  • Page 918: Connecting To Jw-50Cuh, Jw-70Cuh, Jw-100Cuh Or Jw-100Cu

    38.2.3 Connecting to JW-50CUH, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW-100CU Communication driver SHARP JW (1) When using the connector conversion box JW-50CUH Connector JW-70CUH Link unit conversion JW-100CUH JW-100CU External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total Commun External cable connectable Cable model conversion box...
  • Page 919: Connecting To Z-512J

    (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) JW-50CUH JW-70CUH Link unit JW-100CUH JW-100CU External cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Link unit GT11H-C30(3m) GT11H-C60(6m) RS-232 RS232 connection diagram 3) JW-70CUH JW-100CUH GT11H-C30(3m) JW-100CU GT11H-C60(6m) RS-422 GT11H-C100(10m)
  • Page 920 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Z-512J Connection cable External cable Connection cable Total Number of connectable External cable Cable model model distance equipment Model Communication type Connection diagram number RS-232 GT11H-C30-37P(3m) RS232 connection diagram 5) GT11H-C30-37P(3m) Z-512J 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS-422 GT11H-C60-37P(6m) RS422 connection diagram 5)
  • Page 921: Connection Diagram

    38.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 4) GOT and the PLC. Connector conversion SHARP PLC side side 38.3.1 RS-232 cable RD(RXD)  Connection diagram SD(TXD) RS232 connection diagram 1) ER(DTR) Connector conversion SHARP PLC side side DR(DSR)
  • Page 922: Cable

    38.3.2 RS-422 cable  Precautions when preparing a cable  (1) Cable length Connection diagram The total distance (between the GOT and a controller) RS422 connection diagram 1) of RS-232 cable must be 6m or less. Connector conversion (2) Connector conversion box side connector side SHARP PLC side For the connector conversion box side connector, refer...
  • Page 923 RS422 connection diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 6) External cable External cable SHARP PLC side SHARP PLC side GT11H-C side GT11H-C side FG(Shield) FG(Shield) Shield Shield RD(+) RXD(RD(+)) W/R (A) W/R (A) RD(-) RXD(RD(-)) W/BK (A) W/BK (A) GY/R (A) GY/R (A) terminating GY/BK (A)
  • Page 924 RS422 connection diagram 9)  Precautions when preparing a cable External cable SHARP PLC side GT11H-C side (1) Cable length The total distance (between GOT and controllers) of FG(Shield) Shield RS-422 cable must be 13m or less. RD(+) W/R (A) (2) Connector conversion box side connector RD(-) W/BK (A)
  • Page 925: Got Side Settings

    38.4 GOT Side Settings 38.4.1 Setting communication interface 38.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT. Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission speed used for 4800bps, Transmission...
  • Page 926: Plc Side Setting

    38.5 PLC Side Setting 38.5.1 Connecting to JW-22CU, JW- POINT POINT POINT 70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW- 100CU SHARP PLC For details of the SHARP PLC, refer to the following manual.  System memory setting SHARP PLC user's Manual Set the system memory. System Item Set value...
  • Page 927: Connecting To Jw-32Cuh, Jw-33Cuh Or Z-512J

    38.5.2 Connecting to JW-32CUH, 38.5.3 Connecting to the link unit JW-33CUH or Z-512J (JW-21CM)   Settings for connecting to communication Switch setting of the link unit (JW-21CM) port 1 (PG/COMM1 port) Make setting for each switch. Set the system memory. JW-21CM System CM 30 RO...
  • Page 928: Connecting To The Link Unit (Jw-10Cm Or Zw-10Cm)

    38.5.4 Connecting to the link unit (4) Operation mode setting switch (SW3) (JW-10CM or ZW-10CM) Contents of Switch No. Setting setting  Switch setting of link unit (JW-10CM and ZW- SW3-1 OFF (fixed) Invalid 10CM) SW3-2 ON (fixed) 4-wire type SW3-3 OFF (fixed) Invalid...
  • Page 929: Device Range That Can Be Set

    38.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 38 - 17 38.
  • Page 930 38 - 18 38. CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 38.6 Device Range that Can Be Set...
  • Page 931: Connection To Shinko Technos Indicating Controller

    39. CONNECTION TO SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 39.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model Clock Refer to type ACS-13A Series RS-232 39.2.1 ACS-13A/, , C5 JCS-33A-/, C5 JC Series RS-232 39.2.1 JCR-33A-/, C5 JCD-33A-/, C5 JCM-33A Series RS-232...
  • Page 932: System Configuration

    39.2 System Configuration 39.2.1 Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300 Series, PC- 900 Series (PC-955-/M, C5, PC-935-/M, C5) Communication driver Shinko Technos Controller (1) When using the connector conversion box ACS13A,JC, ACS13A,JC, Connector JCM-33A,JIR-301-M, JCM-33A,JIR-301-M, Interface conversion PCD-300 series, PCD-300 series, converter PC-955-/M,C5,...
  • Page 933: (Pc-955-/M, C5, Pc-935-/M, C5)

    (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) ACS13A,JC, ACS13A,JC, JCM-33A,JIR-301-M, JCM-33A,JIR-301-M, Interface PCD-300 series, PCD-300 series, converter PC-955-/M,C5, PC-955-/M,C5, PC-935-/M,C5 PC-935-/M,C5 External cable Connection cable 1) Indicating controller Connection cable 1) Number of Interface Total External cable connectable converter distance Communicati Cable model Max.
  • Page 934 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) FCD-100,FCR-100, FCR-23A, FIR series, PC-955-/M,C, PC-935-/M,C Connection cable External cable Connection cable Indicating controller Number of Total External cable connectable Cable model model distance Model Communication type equipment Connection diagram number FCD-100 FCR-100 1 indicating FCR-23A RS-232...
  • Page 935: Connecting To Dcl-33A Series

    39.2.3 Connecting to DCL-33A Series Communication driver Shinko Technos Controller (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector DCL-33A DCL-33A Interface conversion series series converter External cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) Indicating controller Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Number of Interface Total...
  • Page 936 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) DCL-33A DCL-33A Interface series series converter External cable Connection cable 1) Indicating controller Connection cable 1) Interface Number of Total Cable model converter External cable connectable distance Communication Max. model Model Connection equipment type distance diagram number...
  • Page 937: Connection Diagram

    39.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 3) GOT and the PLC. Indicating External cable 39.3.1 RS-232 cable controller side GT11H-C side FG(Shield) Shield  Connection diagram SD(TXD) W/R (A) RS232 connection diagram 1) ER(DTR) W/BK (A) Connector conversion...
  • Page 938: Cable

    39.3.2 RS-485 cable  Connection diagram RS485 connection diagram 1) Terminating resistor Indicating Indicating Interface converter controller side controller side (IF-400) YA(-) YA(-) YA(-) YB(+) YB(+) YB(+) Pin No. of communication converter differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table. Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.
  • Page 939: Got Side Settings

    39.4 GOT Side Settings 39.4.1 Setting communication interface 39.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT. Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps, transmission speed used for 19200bps,...
  • Page 940: Indicating Controller Side Setting

    39.5 Indicating Controller Side Setting 39.5.2 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR- POINT POINT POINT 100, FCR-23A, FIR Series, PC-900 Series (PC-955-/M, (1) Shinko Technos indicating controller For details of Shinko Technos indicating controller, C, PC-935-/M, C) refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating ...
  • Page 941: Station Number Setting

    39.5.4 Station number setting (3) All station specification Target station differs depending on write-in operation or read-out operation. Set each station number so that no station number • For write-in operation, all station will be a target. overlaps. In the WORD BIT write-in operation, only the The station number can be set without regard to the cable indicating controller whose station No.
  • Page 942: Device Range That Can Be Set

    39.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 39.7 Precautions...
  • Page 943: Connection To Chino Controller

    40. CONNECTION TO CHINO CONTROLLER 40.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model Clock Refer to type LT230 Series LT230 RS-232 40.2.1 LT350 RS-232 LT300 Series 40.2.1 RS-422 LT370 LT450 RS-232 LT400 Series 40.2.1 RS-422 LT470 LT830 Series...
  • Page 944: System Configuration

    40.2 System Configuration 40.2.1 Connecting to LT230, LT300, LT400, LT830, DZ1000, DZ2000, DB1000, DB2000 Series  When connecting to controllers Communication driver CHINO Controllers(MODBUS) (1) When using the connector conversion box LT230,LT830, LT230,LT830, Connector LT300,LT400, LT300,LT400, conversion DZ1000,DZ2000, DZ1000,DZ2000, DB1000,DB2000 DB1000,DB2000 External cable Connection cable...
  • Page 945 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) LT230,LT830, LT230,LT830, LT300,LT400, LT300,LT400, DZ1000,DZ2000, DZ1000,DZ2000, DB1000,DB2000 DB1000,DB2000 External cable Indicating controller Total Number of connectable External cable GOT model distance equipment Model Communication type GT11H-C30(3m) GT11H-C60(6m) RS-232 1 controller for 1 GOT RS232 connection diagram 3) LT300, LT400 DZ1000, DZ2000...
  • Page 946 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) LT230,LT830, LT230,LT830, Interface LT300,LT400, LT300,LT400, DZ1000,DZ2000, DZ1000,DZ2000, converter DB1000,DB2000 DB1000,DB2000 Connection cable 2) External cable Connection cable 1) Indicating Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Interface converter Number of Total controller External cable connectable distance model...
  • Page 947: Connecting To Kp1000, Kp2000, Al3000, Ah3000, Se3000, Ke3000, Le5100, Le5200, Le5300, Or Ju Series

    40.2.2 Connecting to KP1000, KP2000, AL3000, AH3000, SE3000, KE3000, LE5100, LE5200, LE5300, or JU Series  When connecting to controllers Communication driver CHINO Controllers(MODBUS) (1) When using the connector conversion box KP1000, KP2000 KP1000, KP2000 Connector AL3000, AH3000 AL3000, AH3000 SE3000, KE3000 SE3000, KE3000 conversion...
  • Page 948 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) KP1000, KP2000 KP1000, KP2000 AL3000, AH3000 AL3000, AH3000 SE3000, KE3000 SE3000, KE3000 LE5100, LE5200 LE5100, LE5200 LE5300, JU LE5300, JU External cable Indicating controller Total Number of connectable External cable GOT model distance equipment Model Communication type...
  • Page 949 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) KP1000, KP2000 KP1000, KP2000 AL3000, AH3000 AL3000, AH3000 Interface SE3000, KE3000 SE3000, KE3000 converter LE5100, LE5200 LE5100, LE5200 LE5300, JU LE5300, JU External cable Connection cable 2) Connection cable 1) Interface Indicating Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) controller converter...
  • Page 950: Connecting To Gt120 Series

    40.2.3 Connecting to GT120 Series Communication driver CHINO Controllers(MODBUS) (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector Interface GT120 GT120 conversion converter External cable Connection cable 3) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Interface Indicating Connection Connection Connection cable 1) controller cable 2) cable 3)
  • Page 951 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Interface GT120 GT120 converter External cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Indicating Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Interface converter controller Number of Total Max. External cable connectable distance Cable model Cable model Communi distance model...
  • Page 952: Connection Diagram

    40.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 3) GOT and the PLC. CHINO controller External cable side, Interface GT11H-C side converter 40.3.1 RS-232 cable FG(Shield) Shield SD(TXD) W/R (A)  Connection diagram ER(DTR) W/BK (A) RS232 connection diagram 1) RD(RXD)
  • Page 953: Cable

    40.3.2 RS-422 cable  Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1) Interface converter Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/4W) SC8-10 Controller Controller Term Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table. Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal. Do not connect SG of the controller and SG of the converter.
  • Page 954 RS422 connection diagram 2) Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/4W) Connector conversion side Controller Controller RS422 connection diagram 3) Terminating resistor External cable (100Ω 1/4W) GT11H-C-37P side Controller Controller FG(Shield) RS422 connection diagram 4) Terminating resistor External cable (100Ω 1/4W) Controller GT11H-C-37P side Controller FG(Shield) Shield...
  • Page 955 Controller type KP2000 Signal LT300 LT400 DZ1000, DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 KP1000 C, F name Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal No. For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model. This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models. Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) - 12) 13) 14) ...
  • Page 956: Cable

    40.3.3 RS-485 cable  Connection diagram RS485 connection diagram 1) Interface converter Terminating resistor(100Ω 1/4W) SC8-10 Controller Controller Term Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table. Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal. Do not connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.
  • Page 957 RS485 connection diagram 3) Controller Controller (Modular connector) (Modular connector) YB(+) YA(-) For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the CHINO controller RS485 connection diagram 4) Interface converter SCB-10 Controller (Modular connector) Term YB(+) YA(-) Set the Communication Type switch of the converter to RS-...
  • Page 958: Got Side Settings

    40.4 GOT Side Settings 40.4.1 Setting communication interface 40.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT. Item Description Range 9600bps, Set this item when change the 19200bps, Transmission transmission speed used for...
  • Page 959: Controller Side Setting

    40.5 Controller Side Setting 40.5.2 Connecting to LT400, LT830 POINT POINT POINT Series (1) CHINO controller  For details of CHINO controller, refer to the Key Lock setting following manual. To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the User's Manual of the CHINO controller following Key Lock setting.
  • Page 960: Connecting To Db1000, Db2000 Series

    40.5.4 Connecting to DB1000, 40.5.6 Connecting to KP1000, DB2000 Series KP2000   Communication settings Key Lock setting Set the communication settings with controller key To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the operation. Key Lock setting. Item Set value ...
  • Page 961: Connecting To Se3000

    40.5.8 Connecting to SE3000  Setting by Switch (SW2) DIN rail side  Key Lock setting 422A To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the /485 Key Lock setting.  Communication settings Upside Make the communication settings using CHINO parameter setting software (PASS).
  • Page 962: Connecting To Ke3000

    40.5.10 Connecting to KE3000 40.5.11 Connecting to LE5100, LE5200, LE5300  Key Lock setting  To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the Key Lock setting Key Lock setting. To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the Key Lock setting.
  • Page 963: Connecting To Converter Sc8-10

    40.5.12 Connecting to converter SC8- 40.5.13 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable  connection order. There is no problem even if station Communication settings numbers are not consecutive.
  • Page 964: Device Range That Can Be Set

    40.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 40.7 Precautions...
  • Page 965: Connection To Toshiba Plc

    41. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 41.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Communication Series Model Clock Refer to type T2(PU224) RS-422 PROSEC 41.2.1 T Series RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 model 2000(S2) model 2000(S2T) RS-422 PROSEC 41.2.2 V Series model 2000(S2E) model 3000(S3)
  • Page 966: Serial Connection

    41.2 Serial Connection 41.2.1 System configuration for connecting to PROSEC T Series Communication driver TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector PROSEC conversion T series External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Communication Cable model...
  • Page 967 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) PROSEC T series External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Total External cable connectable Cable model model distance Model Communication type equipment Connection diagram number T2(PU224) GT11H-C30-37P(3m) RS-422 GT11H-C60-37P(6m) RS422 connection diagram 2) GT11H-C100-37P(10m) RS-232 GT11H-C30-37P(3m)
  • Page 968: System Configuration For Connecting To Prosec V Series

    41.2.2 System configuration for connecting to PROSEC V Series Communication driver TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector PROSEC conversion V series Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Communication Cable model conversion box model...
  • Page 969: Connection Diagram

    (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) PROSEC V series External cable Total External cable Number of connectable equipment model distance Model Communication type GT11H-C30(3m) GT11H-C60(6m) model 2000 RS-422 GT11H-C100(10m) (S2, S2T, S2E) RS422 connection diagram 6) 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT11H-C30(3m) GT11H-C60(6m) model 3000...
  • Page 970: Connection Diagram

    41.2.3 Connection diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 4) GOT and the PLC. Connector conversion TOSHIBA PLC side side  RS-232 cable RD(RXD) (1) Connection diagram SD(TXD) RS232 connection diagram 1) ER(DTR) Connector conversion TOSHIBA PLC side side DR(DSR)
  • Page 971 (2) Precautions when preparing a cable  RS-422 cable (a) Cable length (1) Connection diagram The total distance (between the GOT and a controller) of RS-232 cable must be 6m or less. RS422 connection diagram 1) (b) Connector conversion box side connector Connector conversion TOSHIBA PLC side For the connector conversion box side connector,...
  • Page 972 RS422 connection diagram 4) RS422 connection diagram 7) Connector conversion Connector conversion TOSHIBA PLC side TOSHIBA PLC side side side TERM RS422 connection diagram 5) RS422 connection diagram 8) External cable External cable TOSHIBA PLC side TOSHIBA PLC side GT11H-C-37P side GT11H-C-37P side FG(Shield) FG(Shield)
  • Page 973 (2) Precautions when preparing a cable (a) Cable length The total distance (between GOT and controllers) of RS-422 cable must be 13m or less. (b) Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector, refer to the following. 6.6 Connector Conversion Box (c) External cable side connector For the connector specifications of the external...
  • Page 974: Got Side Settings

    41.2.4 GOT side settings  Setting communication interface (Communication settings)  Communication detail settings Set the channel of the equipment connected to the Make the settings according to the usage environment. GOT. Item Description Range 4800bps, Set this item when change the 9600bps, transmission speed used for Transmission...
  • Page 975: Plc Side Setting

    41.2.5 PLC side setting  POINT POINT POINT Connecting to T3 or T3H Enter the transmission parameters. TOSHIBA PLC Item Set value For details of the TOSHIBA PLC, refer to the following *1*2 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps Transmission speed manual. Data Bit 7bit TOSHIBA PLC user's Manual Stop Bit...
  • Page 976: Ethernet Connection

    41.3 Ethernet Connection 41.3.1 Connecting to Unified Controller nv Series Communication driver Ethernet( ), Gateway TOSHIBA nv Connector Ethernet conversion module Connection cable External cable Connection cable Maximum Connector Number of connectable segment External cable Ethernet conversion box model equipment Series Cable model length...
  • Page 977: Got Side Settings

    41.3.2 GOT side settings  Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.  Setting communication interface Item Description Range (Communication settings) Set the network No. of the GOT. GOT NET No. 1 to 239 Set the channel of the connected equipment. (Default: 1) Set the station No.
  • Page 978: Plc Side Setting

    41.3.3 PLC side setting  Ethernet setting  Setting of operation mode switch and station address switch Station address setting switch Item Description Set value The host is displayed. (The host is Host indicated with an asterisk (*).) Set the network No. of the connected N/W No.
  • Page 979: Precautions

    Primary, System B: Secondary) is required. 41.4 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
  • Page 980 41 - 16 41. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 41.4 Device Range that Can Be Set...
  • Page 981: Connection To Toshiba Machine Plc

    42. CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 42.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Model Clock Communication type Refer to TC3-01 TC3-02 RS-232 42.2.1 TCmini Series TC6-00 TC8-00 TS2000 Robot controller RS-232 42.2.2 TS2100 Connectable to the products only, which have RS-232 communication function. 42 - 1 42.
  • Page 982: System Configuration

    42.2 System Configuration 42.2.1 Connecting to TC3, TC6, TC8 Communication driver TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini (1) When using the connector conversion box TC3, Connector TC6, conversion Connection cable External cable Connection cable Connector Total Number of connectable External cable Communication Cable model conversion box model distance...
  • Page 983: Connecting To Ts2000, Ts2100

    42.2.2 Connecting to TS2000, TS2100 Communication driver TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector TS2000 conversion TS2100 Connection cable External cable Robot controller Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Communication Cable model conversion box model distance Model...
  • Page 984: Connection Diagram

    42.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 4) GOT and the PLC. TOSHIBA MACHINE Connector conversion box side PLC side 42.3.1 RS-232 cable N.C. RD(RXD)  Connection diagram SD(TXD) RS232 connection diagram 1) ER(DTR) N.C.
  • Page 985  Precautions when preparing a cable (1) Cable length The total distance (between the GOT and a controller) of RS-232 cable must be 6m or less. (2) Connector conversion box side connector For the connector conversion box side connector, refer to the following.
  • Page 986: Got Side Settings

    42.4 GOT Side Settings 42.4.1 Setting communication interface 42.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT. Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps, transmission speed used for 19200bps,...
  • Page 987: Plc Side Setting

    42.5 PLC Side Setting POINT POINT POINT TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC For details of the TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC, refer to the following manual. TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC user's Manual Model Refer to TC3, TC8 42.5.1 PLC CPU 42.5.2 Robot controller TS2000, TS2100 42.5.3 42.5.1 Connecting to TC3, TC8 series No communication settings.
  • Page 988: Device Range That Can Be Set

    42.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 42 - 8 42.
  • Page 989: Servo Amplifier Connection

    43. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 43.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Series Clock Communication type Refer to MINAS A4 MINAS A4F RS-232 43.2.1 RS-485 MINAS A4L MINAS A5 43.2 System Configuration 43.2.1 Connecting to MINAS A4, MINAS A4F, MINAS A4L, MINAS A5 series Communication driver PANASONIC MINAS...
  • Page 990 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) MINAS MINAS External cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Servo amplifier Connection cable 1) Servo amplifier Connection cable 2) Number of Total Commun Max. Commun Cable model Max. External cable connectable distance model Model ication...
  • Page 991: Connection Diagram

    43.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the RS232 connection diagram 4) GOT and the servo amplifier. Connector conversion PANASONIC servo amplifier side box side(9-pin) 43.3.1 RS-232 cable  RD(RXD) Connection diagram SD(TXD) RS232 connection diagram 1) ER(DTR) Connector conversion PANASONIC servo amplifier side...
  • Page 992: Cable

    43.3.2 RS-485 cable  Precautions when preparing a cable  (1) Cable length Connection diagram The length of the RS-232 cable must be 2m or less. RS485 connection diagram 1) (2) Connector conversion box side connector PANASONIC servo PANASONIC servo For the connector conversion box side connector, refer amplifier side amplifier side...
  • Page 993: Got Side Settings

    43.4 GOT Side Settings 43.4.1 Setting communication interface 43.4.2 Communication detail settings (Communication settings) Make the settings according to the usage environment. Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT. Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps, transmission speed used for 19200bps,...
  • Page 994: Setting On Servo Amplifier Side

    43.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side 43.5.3 Station number setting POINT POINT POINT Set each station number so that no station number PANASONIC Servo Amplifier overlaps. For details of the PANASONIC Servo Amplifier, refer to The station number can be set without regard to the cable the following manual.
  • Page 995: Device Range That Can Be Set

    43.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range of controllers that can be used on GT14 Handy, refer to the following manuals. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1) for GT Works3 43.7 Precautions...
  • Page 996 43 - 8 43. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 43.7 Precautions...
  • Page 997: Connection To Panasonic Industrial Devices Sunx Plc

    44. CONNECTION TO PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 44.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models. Model Clock Communication type Refer to FP0-C16CT FP0-C32CT RS-232 44.2.1 FP0R FP1-C24C RS-232 44.2.2 FP1-C40C RS-232 44.2.3 FP2SH RS-232 44.2.4 FP10(S) RS-232 44.2.5 FP-M(C20TC)
  • Page 998: System Configuration

    44.2 System Configuration 44.2.1 Connecting to FP0-C16CT, FP0-C32CT, or FP0R Communication driver Panasonic MEWNET-FP (1) When using the connector conversion box FPO-C16CT, Connector FPO-C32CT, conversion FP0R Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Communication Cable model conversion box model...
  • Page 999: Connecting To Fp1-C24C Or Fp1-C40C

    (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) FPO-C16CT, FPO-C32CT, FP0R Connection cable External cable Connection cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Cable model FP0-C16CT GT11H-C30(3m) FP0-C32CT GT11H-C60(6m) RS-232 AFC8503(3m) FP0R RS232 connection diagram 26) (Tool port) 1 GOT for 1 PLC FP0-C16CT...
  • Page 1000 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) FP peripheral RS422/232C FP1-C24C, device conversion connection FP1-C40C adapter cable Connection cable External cable FP peripheral device connection Connection cable RS422/232 Number of cable Total conversion External cable connectable model distance Commu Cable model equipment adapter Cable model...
  • Page 1001: Connecting To Fp2 Or Fp2Sh

    44.2.3 Connecting to FP2 or FP2SH  When connecting to tool port or RS232C port Communication driver Panasonic MEWNET-FP (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector conversion FP2SH Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Communication Cable model...
  • Page 1002 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) FP2SH Connection cable External cable Connection cable Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment Model Communication type Cable model GT11H-C30(3m) FP2SH RS-232 AFC8503(3m) RS232 connection diagram 26) (Tool port) 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT11H-C30(3m) GT11H-C60(6m) FP2SH...
  • Page 1003 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Computer communication FP2SH unit External cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of Computer Total External cable connectable Communication Cable model model distance communication unit Model equipment type Connection diagram number 1 GOT for 1 RS-232 AFP2462 GT11H-C30-37P(3m)
  • Page 1004: Connecting To Fp3 Or Fp5

    44.2.4 Connecting to FP3 or FP5  When connecting to tool port Communication driver Panasonic MEWNET-FP (1) When using the connector conversion box FP peripheral Connector RS422/232C device conversion conversion connection adapter cable Connection cable External cable FP peripheral device Connection cable connection cable RS422/232C...
  • Page 1005 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) FP peripheral RS422/232C device conversion connection adapter cable External cable FP peripheral device Number of RS422/232C connection cable Total External cable connectable model distance conversion adapter Communication Cable model equipment Model type Connection diagram number 1 GOT for 1 GT11H-C30(3m) AFP5520...
  • Page 1006 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) Computer communication unit Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Computer Total External cable connectable Cable model model distance communication unit Model Communication type equipment Connection diagram number 1 GOT for 1 RS-232 AFP3462 GT11H-C30-37P(3m)
  • Page 1007: Connecting To Fp10(S)

    44.2.5 Connecting to FP10(S)  When connecting to tool port Communication driver Panasonic MEWNET-FP (1) When using the connector conversion box FP peripheral Connector RS422/232C device conversion FP10(S) conversion connection adapter cable Connection cable External cable FP peripheral device Connection cable RS422/232 connection cable Number of...
  • Page 1008 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) FP peripheral RS422/232C device FP10(S) conversion connection adapter cable Connection cable External cable FP peripheral device connection Number of RS422/232 cable Total External cable connectable model distance conversion adapter Communication Cable model equipment Model type Connection diagram number...
  • Page 1009 (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) FP10(S) External cable External cable GOT model Total distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type GT11H-C30(3m) GT11H-C60(6m) FP10(S) RS-232 1 GOT for 1 PLC RS232 connection diagram 6)  When connecting to computer communication unit Communication driver Panasonic MEWNET-FP (1) When using the connector conversion box...
  • Page 1010: Connecting To Fp-M(C20Tc) Or Fp-M(C32Tc)

    (3) When using the external cable (GT11H-C) Computer FP10(S) communication unit External cable Computer communication Total Number of connectable External cable model distance equipment unit Model Communication type GT11H-C30(3m) 1 GOT for 1 computer GT11H-C60(6m) FP10(S) RS-232 AFP3462 communication unit RS232 connection diagram 6) Product manufactured by Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
  • Page 1011 (2) When using the external cable (GT11H-C-37P) FP-M(C20TC), FP-M(C32TC) Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) External cable Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Number of Total External cable connectable Communication model distance Model Cable model Connection diagram number equipment type FP-M(C20TC), FP-M(C32TC) RS-232...
  • Page 1012: Connecting To Fp10Sh

    44.2.7 Connecting to FP10SH  When connecting to tool port or RS232C port Communication driver Panasonic MEWNET-FP (1) When using the connector conversion box Connector FP10SH conversion Connection cable External cable Connection cable Number of Connector Total External cable connectable Communication Cable model conversion box...

Table of Contents